null  null
Electro Controls
Product Catalogue 2017
WattsIndustries.co.uk
Contents
33BMS Temperature Sensors
2Contents
4Thermostats - Mechanical
33Sensors
Various
34 Custom Switch Plates
Various
35 Sensor / Resistance Chart
Various
4
Capillary Thermostat 1 stage
EC
5
Capillary Thermostat 2-3-4 stages
EMC
6
Freeze Protection Thermostat
EFP
7
Immersion Thermostat
EBS EBD
8
Strap-on Thermostat
BRC ESS
37 Single Relay 24V/ 230V/ Adjustable 0-10vdc
ESRM
9
Outside Frost Thermostat
EOF
38 4 Relay Overide 4x 0-10vdc in, 4x Relay out
EROV4
10 Space Thermostat
ECS
39 2 Stg.Relay, Raise-Lower,High-Low 0-10vdc E2RM
11 Room Thermostat 1 stage
TA2 PTR
40 3 Stage Relay, Seq Control, Binary 0-10vdc
E3RMT
12 Room Thermostat 2-3-4 stages
MTR EMR
41 4 Stage Relay, Seq Control, Binary 0-10vdc
E4RM
13 Thermostat Guards
EG
42 6 (10) Stage Relay / Seq Control 0-10vdc
E6RM
43 Phase Cut Module 0-10vdc in 0-20v out
E..PCM
44 Digital Input Multiplexers 4/6 in 0-10vdc out
E..DIM
45 Resistance Output Module
DRN3
46 Raise / Lower in 0-10vdc out
AUD
47 Resistance Module 0-135W in 0-10vdc out
ERIM
48 Transmitter Setpoint Controller
E10-10
49 Analogue Rescaling Module vdc / mA
ARM
50 Analogue Override Module 0-10vdc
ABM4
51 Transformers
E230 E24
14Thermostats - Electronic
14 Sensors / Adjusters for ETE.. & E13..
E10
15 Electronic Thermostats 1 stage digital
ETE-1D
16 Electronic Thermostats 2-4-6-8 stages digital ETE-2D 4D
18 Thermostat / Thermometer - Digital Display
19Temperature Controllers 0-10VDC
ETE-D4/D6
19 Temp Controller Proportional
ETC
20 Temp Controller Proportional-Integral
E15-PTI
21 E14 Temperature Controller Product SelectionE14
22 Temperature Controller 0-10vdc
E14-P
23 Compensator 0-10vdc
E14-PCOM1
24Digital Displays
37 Input-Output Modules
52 Time Switches
52 Time Switches 1 Channel
53 Emergency Products
24 Display Transmitter/Position Indicator 0-10v
EDIG-2
25 Display Transmitter + switch 0-10vdc
EDIG-4
26Thyristor Controls
36 Temperature Transmitters 4-20mA / 0-10vdc Various
26 Single Phase Thyristor 0-10vdc
EY1
27 3 Phase Thyristor 0-10vdc
EY3
28Fan Speed Controls
28 Fan Motor Selection Guide
29 1 Phase Fans
MTY STL
30 0-10V input 1 Phase fans
EVS
31 5 Step Auto 1 Phase fans
STR
32 5 Step Auto 3 Phase fans
STR-4
ETS
53 Alarm Integrator
EAL
54 Remote Alarm Panel 1,2 & 4 Channel
ERA
55 Plant Extension Timer 0-7 hrs
EPX
56 Plant Extension Unit
EXU
57 Fireman’s Switch
EFM EKFM
58 Smoke Detector
RWE ST
59 Rain / Water / Leak Sensors
EW
60 Condensation Sensor
ECB
61Humidity
61 Humidistat
EHR EHD
62 Humidity+Temperature Transmitter
EHRT EHDT
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
63Light
63 Light Level Transmitter 0-10vdc
64Occupancy
ELT
64 Occupancy Detector Ceiling Mounted
EO-C
65 P I R Occupancy Detector
EO
66 Microwave Occupancy Detector
MWS1A-PRM
67Air Quality & Gas Sensors
67 Gas Detector/Transmitter
EGS
68 Gas Monitor Panels
EGD-M
ST-MON350
69 Air Quality Transmitter 0-10vdc
EAQ
70 Carbon Dioxide Transmitter 0-10vdc
ECD
71Wind Speed / Direction Level
71 Wind Speed / Wind Direction Sensor
EWS
72 Wind Speed & Direction Sensor
EWSD
73Air Velocity
73 Air Velocity / Averaging Pitot Tubes
EVP
74 Air Velocity Transmitter 0-10vdc
EAV
75Current Switches / Sensors
75 Current Switches Fixed
ESOL ESLT
76 Current Switches Adjustable
ESOL ESLT
77 Current Sensors 0-10vdc/4-20mA
ESOL ESLT
78Flow
86 Air Differential Pressure Switch
EDA EFS
87 Low Pressure Switch Gas / Air / Liquid
EPG
88 Liquid Pressure Switch
EP
89 Liquid Differential Pressure Switch
EP
90 Air Differential Pressure Transmitter
EDT
91 Liquid Pressure Transmitter
EWT
92 Liquid Diff. Pressure Transmitter
EWDT
93 Damper Actuators / Valve Motors
93 Small 4 / 8 Nm 2 & 3 point
EK4
94 Small 4 / 8 Nm Modulating 0-10vdc
EK4
95 8 / 16 / 24 / 32 Nm 2 & 3 point
E08 E16 E24 E32
96 8 / 16 / 24 / 32 Nm Modulating 0-10vdc
E08 E16 E24 E32
97 8 / 16 / 24 / 32 Nm Modulating Wiring
E08 E16 E24 E32
98 Spring Return Damper/Valve Motors
ER08 ER20
99 Spring Return Damper/Valve wiring
ER08 ER20
100Damper / Valve Motor W/proof Cover
EE-VMC
101Valves / Linkages
101Valve Linkage Mounting Instructions
1022 Way Ball Valve
EB
1033 Way Ball Valve
EB
104Lift & Lay / Seat Valves
MK MKDN
105Rotary / Shoe Valves
AB AC F
106Butterfly Valves
RD RDP
107Spring Return Zone Valves
EZV
108Safety Precautions
78 Air Flow Switch
EAA
79 Liquid Flow Switch 15mm 22mm
ELF..C
80 Liquid Flow Switch 1/2” - 8”
ELF
81Level
86Pressure
81 Liquid Level Switch Horizontal
ELL EL
82 Liquid Level Switch Hi/Low
EL
83 Liquid Level Switch Vertical
EL ETF
84 Liquid Level Ultrasonic 4-20mA
ELU
85 Liquid Level Ultrasonic wiring
ELU
Thermostats - Mechanical
CAPILLARY THERMOSTATS 1 STAGE
EC.. EC..D / EC..DM EC..W
Adjustment under the cover
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm² rising clamps
These products are used to monitor the
temperature of air or liquids. Applications include
heating and air conditioning systems. The liquid
filled sensing element enables a rapid response to
temperature changes.
Copper capillary & bulb
EC..W
Enclosure Flammability UL94-VO
EC..
Range
°C
Diff
°C
Max. ambient -40/+70°C
Thermostats may be calibrated by
slowly turning the centre nut on the
adjusting spindle.
EC..D / EC..DM
Type
Stages
Volt free contacts
230VAC
SPDT
Capillary
Length
Bulb
mm
Max. Bulb
Temp °C
Enclosure
EC-1ML 1
-10/+12 Hand reset open low
15(8)A 1.8m 10 x 100** 200 IP40
EC-2 1
-20/+40 0.5 15(3)A 2m 8 x 140 60 IP43
EC-3 1
-20/+40 1.5 15(6)A 2m 8 x 140 70 IP43
EC-4 1
-20/+40 3.5 15(6)A 2m 8 x 100 180 IP43
EC-5 1
-20/+40 5
15(6)A 2m 8 x 100 180 IP43
EC-6 1
0/100 2
15(4)A 2m 8 x 100 120 IP43
EC-7 1
0/200 5
15(6)A 2m 8 x 70 240 IP43
EC-8 1
0/200 Hand reset open high
15(6)A 2m 8 x 70 240 IP43
EC-3D 1
-15/+45 1.5 15(8)A rigid stem includes duct holder 70 IP43*
EC-6D 1
0/70 2
15(8)A rigid stem includes duct holder 90 IP43*
EC-6DM 1
30/65 Hand reset open high 15(8)A rigid stem includes duct holder 90 IP43*
EC-7DM 1
60/95 Hand reset open high 15(8)A rigid stem includes duct holder 115 IP43*
EC-3W 1
-20/+40 1.5 15(6)A 2m 8 x 140 70 IP65
EC-4W 1
-20/+40 3.5 15(6)A 2m 8 x 100 180 IP65
EC-6W 1
0/100 2
15(4)A 2m 8 x 100 120 IP65
EC-7W 1
0/200 5
15(6)A 2m 8 x 70 240 IP65
EC-8W 1
0/200 Hand reset open high 15(6)A 2m 8 x 70 240 IP65
*Also available with IP65 weatherproof enclosure.
DIMENSIONS
**Size/shape differs from other EC.. thermostats - does not fit standard pockets.
EC.. / EC..W
EC..D / EC..DM
65
70
100
49
EE-1A
FOR SMALL DUCTS
BEND AT REQUIRED LENGTH
20
20
ACCESSORIES:
70
100
57
87
305
65
Duct bulb holder
20
28.5
38
Drilling Data
155
73
62
305
1
40
2
8.3 ID
" BSP
EE-1B Brass Bulbwell
EE-STE Stainless Steel Bulbwell
EC-1ML
WIRING:
W
2
4
B
+T
-20
40
10
OPEN LOW 1-2 opens on temp fall.
Temp must rise to allow resetting.
1
2
3
3
2
-15
3
2
20
1-2 close on temp fall.
1-3 close on temp rise.
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
+T
25
40
+T
1R
4
EC..D / EC..DM
EC.. / EC..W
1
1
OPEN HIGH 1-2 opens on temp rise.
Temp must fall to allow resetting.
Thermostats - Mechanical
Section 01
CAPILLARY THERMOSTATS 2-3-4 STAGES
EMC..
Adjustment under the cover
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm² rising clamp
These products can be used to monitor the
temperature of air or liquids. Applications include
switching multiple heating and air conditioning
systems.
The liquid filled sensing element enables a rapid
response to temperature changes.
Copper capillary & bulb
Volt free contacts
EMC-2..W
Max ambient -40/70°C
Thermostats may be calibrated by
slowly turning the centre nut on the
adjusting spindle.
EMC-2..
EMC-34..
Type Stages Range °C Diff Per Stage °C Diff. Between
Stages °C Enclosure Flammability UL94-VO
230VAC SPDT Capillary Length Bulb mm Max. Bulb Temp °C
Enclosure
EMC-22A 2
- 20/+40 1.5 1/10 adj. 2x15(3)A 2m 8 x 140 60 IP43
EMC-23A 2
0/100 2.5 2/20 adj. 2x15(3)A 2m 8 x 100 120 IP43
EMC-22AW 2
- 20/+40 1.5 1/10 adj. 2x15(3)A 2m 8 x 140 60 IP65
EMC-23AW 2
0/100 2.5 2/20 adj. 2x15(3)A 2m 8 x 100 120 IP65
EMC-341 3/4 - 20/+40 1
1
4x15(3)A 3m 8 x 140 60 IP65
EMC-342 3/4 0/100 2
2.5 4x15(3)A 3m 8 x 100 120 IP65
DIMENSIONS
EMC-22A.. / 23A..
EMC-34..
125
50
107
65
70
57
87
125
100
107
4 x 6.5
20
EE-1A
ACCESSORIES:
25
20
Duct bulb holder
155
73
62
305
1
40
2
8.3 ID
" BSP
EE-1B Brass Bulbwell
EE-STE Stainless Steel Bulbwell
WIRING:
EMC-22..
EMC-34..
-20
-20
15
15
40
40
25
+
_
A
1
1
3
25
2
2
1
+T
1
2
+T
Diff between stages adjust via screw A
Contact 1-3 close on temp rise.
Contact 1-2 close on temp fall.
1
2
+T
3
4
2
1
3
2
3
1
2
+T
3
3
1
2
+T
4
3
1
2
3
+T
Htg only = wire 1st stg htg to last stg on stat & follow downwards in sequence
Clg only = wire 1st stg clg to 1st stg on stat & follow upwards in sequence
Htg & Clg = wire heating on lower stages & cooling on higher stages
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
5
Thermostats - Mechanical
FREEZE PROTECTION THERMOSTATS
EFP..
Tamperproof adjustment
Copper capillary tin plated
These products are used to prevent the freezing
of liquids inside pipes or heating/cooling coils.
Volt free contacts
Max. ambient -30/+70 C
Enclosure Flammability UL94-V0
EFP..
EFP.. W
Type
Range °C
Diff °C
EFP-1
-15/+15
EFP-2
-15/+15
EFP-3
-15/+15
EFP-4
-15/+15
230VAC
SPDT
2
24(10)A
2
hand reset open low
EFP-1W
-15/+15
-15/+15
EFP-3W
-15/+15
EFP-4W
-15/+15
2
6m
hand reset open low
200IP43
200
IP43
200IP43
24(10)A
200
3m
24(10)A
2
Enclosure
24(10)A 3m
24(10)A 6m
hand reset open low
DIMENSIONS
Max. Bulb
Temp °C
24(10)A 6m
hand reset open low
EFP-2W
Capillary
Length
6m
IP43
200IP65
200
IP65
24(10)A 3m
200IP65
24(10)A
200
3m
EFP..
IP65
EFP..W
85
70
125
40
1
64
50
107
25
10
37
30
75
125
4,5
107
7,5
20
4 x 6.5
conduit
20
ACCESSORIES:
EE-1C
Capillary Clips (per pack of 6)
100mm max
WIRING:
1
2
T+
4
Open low = Contact 1 - 4 opens on temperature fall.. Temperature must rise to allow resetting
INSTALLATION:
6
Fit the sensor to the front of the coil (downstream/air offside) or wrap around the pipe to guard against freezing at any point. No more
than 10cm of the capillary should be outside the controlled space. The thermostat will switch when 30cm or more of any part of the
capillary senses the set-point temperature. If the capillary is damaged, the unit will cut-out to the safety side.
THE TEMPERATURE AROUND THE HOUSING SHOULD BE MAINTAINED HIGHER THAN THE SENSOR.
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
Thermostats - Mechanical
Section 01
IMMERSION THERMOSTATS SINGLE/DUAL FUNCTION
EBS.. EBD..
Hand reset models have a push
button on the front cover.
These products are used to monitor liquid
temperatures in pipes, boilers, tanks etc. The
liquid filled sensing enables a rapid response to
temperature changes.
The EBS is a single function thermostat and the
EBD dual function has two separate thermostats
inside the enclosure.
Volt free contacts
Max. ambient 80°C (EBS-1 55°C)
EBD..
All supplied complete with removable brass
pocket ½" BSP.
Concealed adjustment
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-V0
EBS..
Type Range °C Diff. °C 230VAC SPDT Control Limit Control Limit Control Limit Bulbwell Length Max. Bulb Temp. °C
Enclosure
EBS-1 EBS-2 EBS-3 EBS-4 EBS-7 EBS-8 EBS-9 0/35 -
0/80 -
35/95 -
50/130 -
-
30/65 -
60/95 -
95/130 0.5
2
4
6
Hand reset open high Hand reset open high Hand reset open high -
-
-
-
-
-
-
10(3)A 10(3)A 15(5)A 15(5)A 15(5)A 15(5)A 15(5)A -
-
-
-
-
-
-
120 100 100 100 100 100 100 55 100 115 150 90 115 150 IP43
IP43
IP43
IP43
IP43
IP43
IP43
EBS-20/L280 EBS-30/L280 EBS-70/L280 EBS-80/L280 0/70 35/95 -
-
2
4
Hand reset open high Hand reset open high -
-
-
-
10(3)A 15(5)A 15(5)A 15(5)A -
-
-
-
280 280 280 280 90 115 90 115 IP43
IP43
IP43
IP43
EBD-1 EBD-2 EBD-8 EBD-9 0/80 0/80
35/95 35/95 35/95 60/95 50/130 95/130 2
4
4
4
2
4
Hand reset open high Hand reset 10(3)A 15(5)A 15(5)A 15(5)A 10(3)A 15(5)A 15(5)A 15(5)A 100 100 100 100 100 115 115 115 IP43
IP43
IP43
IP43
EBD-32/L260 EBD-38/L260 35/95 35/95 4
4
4
Hand reset open high 15(5)A 15(5)A 15(5)A 15(5)A 260 260 115 115 IP43
IP43
-
-
30/65 60/95 35/95 60/95 DIMENSIONS
EBS..
57
1
2
EBD..
" BSP
57
85
7.3 ID
85
1
2
" BSP
14.3 ID
78
53
M20
ACCESSORIES:
20
100 / 120 / 280
EE-9B EE-ST9 Spare brass pocket Stainless steel pocket 100mm for EBS-2..9 100mm for EBS-2..9 M20
100 / 260
20
( NOT for EBS-1)
( NOT for EBS-1)
100
1
WIRING:
2
7.3 ID
" BSP
EBD..
EBS..
3
3
2
+T
1
1-2 close on temp fall.
removable link
2
-15
3
2
+T
+T
25
40
1
1-3 close on temp rise.
1
3
2
3
1
3
2
-15
25
40
1
2
-15
25
40
1
OPEN HIGH Contact 1-2 opens on temp rise. Temp must fall to allow resetting
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
7
Thermostats - Mechanical
STRAP-ON THERMOSTATS
BRC.. ESS..
Volt free contacts
ESS.. Adjustment under the cover
These products can be used to monitor the
temperature of liquids in pipes and cylinders.
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm
Enclosure Flammability: BRC=UL94-HB
ESS=UL94-V0
ESS..
BRC..
Type
Range °C
Diff °C
230VAC
SPDT
Max. Bulb
Temp °C
Enclosure
BRC 15(3)A 120 IP30
20/90 5
ESS-1 -25/+45 2
10(3)A
70 IP43
ESS-2 0/70 2
10(3)A
90 IP43
ESS-32 35/95 4
15(5)A
115 IP43
ESS-3 50/130 6
15(5)A
130 IP43
ESS-42 30/65 Hand reset open high 15(5)A
90 IP43
ESS-4 60/95 Hand reset open high
15(5)A 115 IP43
DIMENSIONS
BRC..
ESS..
46
38
57
65
96
107
70
86
20
19
ACCESSORIES:
FIXING STRAP FOR BRC
FIXING STRAP FOR ESS
EE-ESS
FIXING STRAP ADJUSTABLE UP TO 150MM DIA. IS INCLUDED.
LONGER FIXING STRAPS ARE AVAILABLE ON REQUEST.
WIRING:
BRC..
2
1
ESS..
3
3
2
40
+T
3
-15
INSTALLATION:
8
+T
25
1
Contacts 1-3 close on temperature rise. Contacts 1-2 close on temperature fall. 2
1
Contacts 1-3 close on temperature rise.
Contacts 1-2 close on temperature fall.
Open high = Contact 1-2 opens on temperature rise. Temp must fall to allow resetting.
Fix the thermostat securely to the pipe. The ambient temperature around the sensor can affect the switching point.
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
Thermostats - Mechanical
Section 01
OUTSIDE FROST THERMOSTATS
EOF..
Adjustment under the cover on
all models
EOF thermostats are used to monitor
temperature outside buildings and switch
heating/cooling or other units in the event of
high/low temperatures. The EOF-01 is a single
function unit and the EOF-21 is a dual function
unit which has 2 separate thermostats inside
one enclosure.
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-V2
EOF-01 is single function
EOF-21 is dual function
(2 thermostats inside one enclosure)
EOF-01
EOF-21
Type
Range °C
Diff °C
230VAC
SPDT
EOF-01 10(3)ABimetal
EOF-21
-20/+30
-20/+30 & -20/+30
1
1
Sensing
Element
2x10(3)A
Max. Ambient
°C
Bimetal
Enclosure
60
IP65
60
IP65
DIMENSIONS
EOF-01
EOF-21
125
107
25
50
125
175
157
107
50
125
4 x 6.5
25
107
20
4 x 6.5
20
WIRING:
EOF-01
N
4
EOF-21
Htg
Clg
L
L
L
2
3
1
+T
On temperature rise 2-1 close
On temperature fall 2-3 close
INSTALLATION:
N
L
4
2
Htg
Clg
L
L
3
1
N
L
Htg
L
4
2
3
+T
Clg
L
1
+T
On temperature rise 2-1 close
On temperature fall 2-3 close
Outside Thermostats & Sensors which are used for frost protection should be mounted on the North side of the building.
If this is not possible, shield the sensor from direct sunlight.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
9
Thermostats - Mechanical
SPACE THERMOSTATS
ECS..
Adjustment under the cover
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm rising clamps
Type ECS thermostats monitor temperatures
inside factories, greenhouses and areas subject
to high humidity or regular washdown processes.
The liquid filled sensing elements are fixed to the
side of the weatherproof enclosures.
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-V2
ECS..
Type
Range °C
Diff °C
230VAC
SPDT
Sensing Element
Max.Ambient
°C
Enclosure
ECS-3
-20/+40
1.5
15(6)A Volt free
Bellows
60
IP65
ECS-4
-20/+40
3.5
15(6)A Volt free
Bellows
60
IP65
ECS-6
0/80
2.5
15(4)A Volt free
Bellows
80
IP65
DIMENSIONS
ECS..
75
50
57
107
125
4 x 6.5
WIRING:
20
ECS..
3
2
1
+T
Contact 1-2 close on temp fall.
10
25
-20
10
40
20
Contact 1-3 close on temp rise.
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
Thermostats - Mechanical
Section 01
ROOM THERMOSTATS 1 STAGE
EOF..
TA-2
Main adjustment via knob.
Backplate for 1 gang BS box is included.
These products can be used to monitor the
temperature inside buildings and switch heating,
cooling or other units. These units are
tamperproof.
RTBSB-001.010/045/048
Knob adjustment only.
Range and limit stops provided.
Order backplate separately.
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-V0
TA-2
RTBSB-001.910
Adjustment under the cover.
PTR01-0..
PTR01-910
Type
Stages
Range
°C
Diff °C
approx
230VAC
Element
Function
Sensing
Enclosure
TA-2
1
5/30
1
SPDT 10(2.5)A Volt Free Contacts
Htg or Clg
Bellows
IP20
RTBSB-001.045
1
-20/+30
0.5
SPDT 10(3)A -
Htg or Clg
Bimetal
IP30
RTBSB-001.010
1
5/30
0.5
SPDT 10(3)A -
Htg or Clg
Bimetal
IP30
RTBSB-001.048
1
10/60
0.5
SPDT 10(3)A -
Htg or Clg
Bimetal
IP30
RTBSB-001.910*
1
5/30
0.5
SPDT 10(3)A -
Htg or Clg
Bimetal
IP30
* Concealed adjustment.
DIMENSIONS
RTBSB..
TA-2
80
74
42
23
80
74
70
60
ACCESSORIES:
EG-1000 EG-2000 EG-3000 Stat Guard Internal Dims Stat Guard Internal Dims Stat Guard Internal Dims 133 H x 155 W x 70 D
102 H x 123 W x 60 D
123 H x 196 W x 70 D
High impact polycarbonate, virtually unbreakable. Supplied with lock & key
EE-BP2 EG..
Backplate for RTBSB.. will fit square or round outlet boxes.
WIRING:
TA-2
1
3
EE-8P2
RTBSB-001.010/045/048/910
4
N
L
HTG
L
4
2
3
CLG
L
1
+T
C
+T
To remove the TA-2 front cover and
access the terminals, release the
top clip using a small, flat screwdriver.
INSTALLATION:
Install at a height of approx. 1.5m
Keep away from radiators, direct sunlight & other heat sources.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
11
Thermostats - Mechanical
ROOM THERMOSTATS 2-3-4 STAGES
MTR..
Knob adjustment with range and
These products can be used to monitor the
temperature inside buildings. Up to 4 stages are
available to control multiple heating/cooling or
other units in various combinations.
limit stops.
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-V0
EMR..
MTR10.. / METR75..
Adjustment under the cover.
For various combinations of htg/clg.
Volt free contacts
MTR52..
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm² rising clamps
EMR..
Type Stages Range °C Diff Per Stage °C Diff. Between
Stages °C Switch Rating
Function
230VAC
Sensing Element Enclosure
MTR10-005 2
5/30
1
2
2 x 10(3)A 1 Htg + 1 Clg
Bimetal
IP30
METR75-820 2
5/30
1
0.5/5 adj.
2 x 8(3)A 2 Htg
NTC
IP30
1 Htg + 1 Clg
Bimetal
IP30
MTR52-018 2
5/30
1
On-Off switch
2
2 x 10(3)A EMR-22A EMR-34 On-Off switch & 3 speed fan switch
2
0/50
1
1/10 adj.
2 x SPDT 15(3)A Volt free Htg/Clg
Bellows
IP30
3/4
0/50
1
1
4 x SPDT 15(3)A Volt free Htg/Clg
Bellows
IP30
MTR..
188
140
70
27.5
164
ACCESSORIES:
110
79
60
EG-1000 EG-2000 EG-3000 Stat Guard Internal Dims 133 H x 155 W x 70 D
Stat Guard Internal Dims 102 H x 123 W x 60 D
Stat Guard Internal Dims 123 H x 196 W x 70 D
(Guards are not suitable for EMR.. )
High impact polycarbonate, virtually unbreakable. Supplied with lock & key
WIRING:
METR75-820
CLG
L
L
HTG
L
2
3
Supply
N
Heat 1 Heat 2
1
MTR52-018
Load
L
L
3
4
L in
L out
N
7
8
9
4
1
2
5
6
Clg
L
1
L
Htg
L
N
N
2
3
4
7
I
II
III
14
15
16
L
N
8
9
10
ON/OFF
switch
R
On-Off
II
I
+T
+T
III
EMR-34
1
2
STAGES
1
2
STAGES
3
3
2
4
-20
15
40
2
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
1
3
1
2
25
A
+
_
Diff between stages
adjust via screw A
12
3
+T
+T
+T
+T
Htg only = wire 1st stg htg to last stg on stat & follow downwards in sequence
Clg only = wire 1st stg clg to 1st stg on stat & follow upwards in sequence
Htg & Clg = wire heating on lower stages & cooling on higher stages
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
+T
+T
3
Thermostats - Mechanical
Section 01
THERMOSTAT GUARDS
Supplied with lock and key
Ideal for use in public areas,
sports halls etc.
A range of transparent, high impact,
polycarbonate thermostat guards for use with a
variety of thermostats/sensors etc.
The guards screw fix to the wall over the
existing thermostat.
Flammability = UL94-V0
EG-2000
Self locking snap-lock cover,
use key to unlock.
EG-3000
EG-1000
Type Application Examples
Description
EG-1000 MTR10.. Virtually unbreakable
Unobstructed airflow
Tamperproof
EG-2000 TA-2, PTR01.. ER.. EH.. EHR.. Virtually unbreakable
Unobstructed airflow
Tamperproof
EG-3000
Various (Not suitable for EMR..)
Virtually unbreakable
Unobstructed airflow
Tamperproof
EG-KEY
DIMENSIONS
EG-1000
D
EG-2000
W
D
EG-3000
W
D
W
H
H
H
EXTERNAL
H 192
W 212
D 70
EXTERNAL
H
152
W 170
D
60
EXTERNAL
H
181
W
251
D
70
INTERNAL
H 133
W 155
D 70
INTERNAL
H 102
W 123
D
60
INTERNAL
H
123
W
196
D
70
INSTALLATION:
AIRFLOW
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
13
Thermostats - Electronic
SENSORS / ADJUSTERS / DISPLAYS FOR ETE.. THERMOSTATS / E13.. CONTROLLERS
E10..
NTC sensors, adjusters
& displays for use with
ETE.. Electroic
Thermostats /
Thermometers & E13..
Temperature Controllers.
E10-G..
Function
E10-D
E10-X
E10-C
E10-K
E10-H
Enclosure Flammability:
E10-D, I, S, X = UL94-V0
E10-H, R, V = L94-HB
E10-T = UL94-V2
Type E10-B
E10-S
E10-V
E10-R
E10-P..
Description
E10-I
E10-T
Dimensions
E10-B Bead sensor
With 2 way terminal strip
–
E10-C
Cable Sensor
With 2mm cable
Sensor 7.1 mm dia x 40
E10-D
Duct sensor
Probe length 160mm
Approx 80 dia x 55
E10-DA Duct Averaging
Probe length160mm (use 2 x E10-DA for averaging)
Approx 80 dia x 55 E10-H
Black bulb sensor
For radiant tube heaters
85H x 85W x 30D + bulb 16mm
E10-I
Immersion sensor
ORDER POCKET SEPARATELY Probe length 120mm
Approx 80 dia x 55
E10-K
Fan coil sensor
With duct flange & 2m cable
Duct tube 80mm long
E10-R
Room sensor
Can be mounted on square or round outlet box
85H x 85W x 30D
E10-RA Room sensor
As E10-R (use 2 x E10-RA for averaging)
85H x 85W x 30D
E10-S
Strap-On sensor
Includes fixing strap for up to 6" dia. Pipe. 2m cable
Approx 80 dia x 55
E10-V
Room sensor + Knob With knob adj ±4°C above & below main set point knob setting
85H x 85W x 30d + knob
E10 -X Outside sensor
Weather proof
Approx 80 dia x 55
E10-P50 Setpoint adjuster
-10/+50°C Front panel moubting
48H x 48W
E10-P95 Setpoint adjuster
25/95°C
Front panel mounting
48H x 48W
E10-P4 Setpoint adjuster
±4°C
Front panel mounting.
For minor adjustment of main set point knob setting
48H x 48W
E10-T
Digital display
Selectable -10/+50°C or 25/95°C
230 VAC supply. Front panel mounting 48H x 96W x 104D Panel cut-out
44H x 91W
Only for use with ETE.. Thermostats or E13.. Temperature Controllers
OPTIONAL E10-T.. ONLY
L24 = 24VAC supply
Protection
IP00
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP30
IP65
IP65
IP30
IP30
IP65
IP30
IP65
IP00
Temperature °C:-10-5 0 5 101520253035404550 556065707580 859095
Resistance KΩ:5440302520.5
15.2
12107.86.25 43.32.72.221.61.4
1.1 10.9
0.8
ACCESSORIES:
EE-STK ½" BSP x 120mm Stainless Steel pocket for E10-I
Special Face Plates are available in Brass, White, Satin and others on request
(see page G2)
WIRING:
E10.. SENSORS
E10-RA
INSTALLATION:
14
Terminals 0.5 -2.5mm²
Max length 100mm.
E10-P..
E10-V using in-built sensor
Sensor cable size 7/0.2mm
Screened cable is recommended.
DRILLING DETAIL FOR E10-P..
E10-V using remote sensor
Keep away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
The screen should be earthed at the controller end only.
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
Thermostats - Electronic
Section 02
ELECTRONIC THERMOSTAT - 1 STAGE DIGITAL
ETE-1D
LCD display.
Digital set up of control mode, set point,
night set back and differential.
Volt free relay contacts.
Ambient -10 to +50 deg C.
Temperature resolution 0.5 deg C.
°C/°F display (ETE-1D mode only).
Night setback is standard via optional
time switch.
Compatible with the functions and accessories
of the ETE-150 and ETE-195 range.
This product monitors the temperature
of air or liquid in a heating system and
controls heating or cooling units in
response to temperature changes
Type
ETE-1D
Range
Deg C
Differential
Deg C
Night set
Range C
Supply
+- 10%
230VAC
SPDT
Power
Consumed
Protection
-10/+95
0.5/10
0-40
230VAC
10(3)A
0.5W max
IP00
Add L24 for optional 24VAC supply.
A 120VAC version is available on request.
Accessory type
Accessory part number
Selected Product mode
ETE-1D ETE-150ETE-195
Temperature sensors
E10-B/C/D/DA/G./H/I/K/R/RA/S/V/X ✓
✓
✓
Set point adjuster
E10-P4,E10-P50 and E10-P95 ✓
✓
Digital Set point adjuster
E10-S110 ✓
Digital room sensor
E10-RD ✓
Analogue Display
E10-T ✓
✓
Digital display
E10-TD ✓
EnclosureEE-M1T
✓
✓
✓
DIN rail holder
EE-DR1 ✓
✓
✓
ACCESSORIES
See table for the valid accessories
DIMENSIONS/TERMINATIONS:
24mm
Connections
L and N
NO,C,NC
S1 and S2
0 and N1
PA and PB
P4 and P0
P0 and PR
D1 and D0
65 mm
Electro Controls
ETE-1D
°C/°F
Single Stage Thermostat
www.electrocontrols.co.uk
BLACK TEKNIGAS & ELECTRO CONTROLS LTD
SET
PB
PA
EXT
POT
PR
±4ºC
P4
N1
0V/
D0
D1
108 mm
P0
230VAC or 24VAC supply
Volt free relay connections
Sensor
Night setback
E10-S110 Remote set point adjuster
E10-P4
E10-P50 or E10-P95
E10-T
S2
S1
NO
C
to select
To select HTG/CLG or
NC
VOLT FREE 230VAC 10(3)A
HTG/CLG and
N
230VAC
ETE-1D / 50/ 95, press and hold
SET for3sec.Use to select
L
ETE-1D / 50/ 95. Press SET to exit.
50/60Hz
RL1
LED1
EXAMPLE:
DIFFERENTIAL
ON
RELAY
OFF
ON
TEMP(°C)
30
EXAMPLE:
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
EXAMPLE:
DIFFERENTIAL
ON
RELAY
OFF
ON
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
ON
OFF
TEMP(°C)
30
EXAMPLE:
DIFFERENTIAL
ON
RELAY
TEMP(°C)
SET UP:
29
This diagram shows some examples(SP)
of the relay state with rising and
falling temperatures for the cooling and heating modes.
TIMING DIAGRAM:
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20 21
(SP)
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20 19
(SP)
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
Turn on the power. Momentarily the display will show all the screen characters then the Product mode EtE1D (ETE-1D), EtE50 (ETE-150) or
ON
ON settle to showOFHTG/CLG,
F
EtE95RELAY
(ETE-195) and will
TEMP
and the actual temperature. This is the main menu or Temperature screen.
To select HTG/CLG and one of the Product modes ETE-1D, ETE-150 or ETE-195 press the set button for 3 sec. HTG/CLG and the last
TEMP(°C)
selected Product mode will flash.
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
(SP)
Use ↓ button to select either ETE1D, ETE50
or ETE95.
Use ↑ button to select either HTG or CLG
Press SET briefly to exit.
Briefly press SET repeatedly to select the required parameters of SETPOINT, NIGHT SET and DIFFERENTIAL. The numerical values of these
parameters will be blinking and the ↑↓ buttons can be used to set the numerical value required.
Whilst setting any parameter if the buttons are left for 10 sec the screen will return to the Temperature screen.
In the Temperature screen use of the ↑↓ buttons will toggle between °C and °F if required.
DIFFERENTIAL
DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES
SEN0P
Sensor open circuit.
Sensor short circuit
SENs Set temperature below or above product range
Lo/ ErrPA
E10-S110 short circuit (ETE-1D only). Once this problem has been addressed press SET to revert to normal operation.
INSTALLATION:
Observe the local regulations regarding electrical installations. Size the power supply cables according to the load.
The minimum sensor cable size is 7/0.2mm with a max length of 100m. Screened cable is recommended and the screen should be earthed
at the controller end only. Keep supply and sensor cables away from other power cables and devices which may cause interference.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
15
Thermostats - Electronic
ELECTRONIC THERMOSTAT - 2-4-6-8 STAGE DIGITAL
ETE-..D
ETE-4D
ETE-2D
LCD display.
Digital set up of control mode, Set Point,
Night Setback, Time Delay,
Differential per Stage and Difference between Stages.
Volt free relay contacts.
Ambient -10 to +50 deg C.
Temperature resolution 0.5 deg C.
°C or °F selection (ETE-2D, 4D, 6D or 8D only).
Time delay 1-200 seconds all models.
Night Setback is standard via optional time switch.
Compatible with the functions and accessories of
the ETE-(2/4/6/8)50 and ETE-(2/4/6/8)95.
These products monitor the temperature
of air or liquid in a heating system and
control heating or cooling units in
response to temperature changes.
ETE-8D
Type
Stages
Range (°C)
Differential
per Stage (°C)
Difference
b/w Stages (°C)
Night Set
Range (°C)
Supply
+- 10%
230VAC
SPDT
Power
Consumed
ETE-2D
2
-10/+95
0.5/5 adj
1/15 adj
0-40
230VAC
10(3)A
2VA max
ETE-4D
4
-10/+95
0.5/3 adj
1/6 adj
0-40
230VAC
10(3)A
3VA max
ETE-6D
6
-10/+95
0.5/3 adj
1/3 adj
0-40
230VAC
10(3)A
5VA max
ETE-8D
8
-10/+95
0.5/3 adj
1/3 adj
0-40
230VAC
10(3)A
5VA max
Add L24 for optional 24VAC/DC supply.
A 120VAC version is available on request
ACCESSORIES
See table below for the valid accessories
Accessory type
Accessory part number
Selected Product mode
ETE-2D,4D,6D or 8D
ETE-250,450,650 or 850
ETE-295,495, 695 or 895
Temperature sensors
E10-B/C/D/DA/G./H/I/K/R/RA/S/V/X
✓
✓
✓
Set point adjuster
E10-P4,E10-P50 and E10-P95
✓
✓
Digital Set point adjuster
E10-S110
✓
Digital room sensor
E10-RD
✓
Analogue Display
E10-T
✓
✓
Digital display
E10-TD
✓
EE-M2T Enclosure for ETE-2D
EE-M3T Enclosure for ETE-4D
EE-M5T Enclosure for ETE-6D and 8D
EE-DR6 Din rail holder for ETE-2D
EE-DR7 Din rail holder for ETE-4D
EE-DR5 Din rail holder for ETE-6D and 8D
DIMENSIONS/TERMINATIONS:
ETE-2D
ETE-4D
24mm
N1
www.electrocontrols.co.uk
NC1
NO1
C1
NC2
NO2
C2
VOLT FREE 230VAC 10(3)A
C2
4 Stage Thermostat
www.electrocontrols.co.uk
Electro Controls
ETE- 4D
4 Stage Thermostat
www.electrocontrols.co.uk
4 Stage Thermostat
www.electrocontrols.co.uk
50/60Hz
230VAC
ETE-8D
C1N NC2
NC1 NO2
NO1 C2C1 NC3
NC2 NO3
NO2 C3C2 NC4
NC3 NO4
NO3 C4C3
NC3 NO3
C1
NC2 NO2
C2
C3
NC4 NO4
C4
L
N
NC1
NO1
C1
NC2
NO2
C2
NC3
NO3
C3
°C/°F
NC4
STAGE6
STAGE5
STAGE7
STAGE6
PA
PR
P0
PB
P0
0V/
D0
0V/
D0
±4ºC
D1
S1
S1
S2
0V/
D0
Electro Controls
L
L
N
N
L
N
50/60Hz
NC1 NO1L
230VAC
NC1 NO1
RL8
RL7
RL6
RL5
RL4
RL3
RL2
C1N NC2
NC1 NO2
NO1 C2C1 NC3
NC2 NO3
NO2 C3C2 NC4
NC3 NO4
NO3 C4C3 NC5
NC4 NO5
NO4 C5C4 NC6
NC5 NO6
NO5 C6C5 NC7
NC6 NO7
NO6 C7C6 NC8
NC7 NO8
NO7 C8C7
NC3 NO3
C3
NC5 NO5
C5
NC6 NO6
C6
NC7 NO7
C7
NC8 NO8
C8
C1
NC2 NO2
C2
NC4 NO4
C4
ETE- 6 8 D
6/8 Stage Thermostat
www.electrocontrols.co.uk
50/60Hz
230VAC
NC1
NO1
C1
NC2
NO2
C2
NC3
NO3
C3
239mm
NO4
NC4
239mm
C4
239mm
NO5
C5
NC5
NC8
NC6
NO6
C6
NC7
NO7
C7
NC8
NO8
C8
C8
NO8
C8
BLACK TEKNIGAS & ELECTRO CONTROLS LTD
www.electrocontrols.co.uk
50/60Hz
230VAC
NO8
230VAC 10(3)A
VOLT FREE
6/8 Stage Thermostat
www.electrocontrols.co.uk
NC8
230VAC 10(3)A
VOLT FREE
ETE- 6 8 D
6/8 Stage Thermostat
C1N NC2
NC1 NO2
NO1 C2C1 NC3
NC2 NO3
NO2 C3C2 NC4
NC3 NO4
NO3 C4C3 NC5
NC4 NO5
NO4 C5C4 NC6
NC5 NO6
NO5 C6C5 NC7
NC6 NO7
NO6 C7C6 NC8
NC7 NO8
NO7 C8C7
230VAC 10(3)A
VOLT FREE
ETE- 6 8 D
RL1
S1
NO1L
BLACK TEKNIGAS & ELECTRO
BLACK
TEKNIGAS
CONTROLS
LTD & ELECTRO CONTROLS LTD
S2
Electro Controls
L
N
NC1
C4
N1
D1
P4
S2
N1
D1
Electro Controls
NO4
P4
STAGE8
RL8
STAGE8
RL7
RL8
STAGE7
C4
C4
PB
PR
P4
PA
N1
PR
STAGE8
STAGE7
RL7
RL6
STAGE6
RL5
RL6
RL4
STAGE5
RL5
STAGE4
RL3
RL4
RL3
RL2
RL1
RL2
STAGE3
NC4
NO4
SET
±4ºC
STAGE5
STAGE4
NO4
PA
EXT
POT
STAGE4
STAGE3
NC4
°C/°F
P0
RL1
EXT
POT
NO1L
NO1
SET
STAGE2
S1
RL4
NC1
NC1
PB
STAGE1
RL3
RL4
RL4
RL3
N
N
SET
STAGE3
STAGE2
S1
S2
0V/
D0
L
L
°C/°F
STAGE2
STAGE1
0V/
D0
D1
S2
Wire Stages:
Lower for HTG
Higher for CLG
108 mm
108 mm 108 mm
STAGE4
NC1 NO2
NC3 NO4
C1N NC2
NO1 C2C1 NC3
NC2 NO3
NO2 C3C2 NC4
NO3 C4C3
Wire Stages:
Lower for HTG
Higher for CLG
16
RL3
RL1
RL2
RL2
RL1
NO1L
RL1
Electro
NC1
N Controls
ETE- 4D
To select NEUTRAL ZONE or
ETE-68D/50/95, press and hold SET
for 3sec.Use to select NEUTRAL ZONE
and to select ETE-68D/50/95. Press SET to exit.
STAGE1
N1
D1
P4
S2
N1
S1
L
Electro Controls
ETE- 4D
To select NEUTRAL ZONE or To select NEUTRAL ZONE or
ETE-68D/50/95, press and hold SET
ETE-68D/50/95, press and hold SET
Use to select NEUTRAL ZONE
for 3sec.Use to select NEUTRAL
for 3sec.
ZONE
to exit.ETE-68D/50/95. Press SET to exit.
to select
and to select ETE-68D/50/95. Press
and SET
Wire Stages:
Lower for HTG
Higher for CLG
STAGE3
EXT
POT
N
C2
STAGE2
50/60Hz
230VAC
RL2
RL2
50/60Hz
NC1
NO1L C1N NC2
NC1 NO2
NO1 C2C1
NC2 NO2
VOLT FREE
10(3)ANO2 VOLT
FREE 230VAC 10(3)A
NC1
NO1
C1 230VAC
NC2
C2
230VAC
www.electrocontrols.co.uk
50/60Hz L
230VAC
NO2
P4
STAGE4
±4ºC
N
N
ETE-2D
0V/
D0
D1
50/60Hz
230VAC
EXT
POT
50/60Hz L
230VAC L
Electro Controls
NC2
STAGE1
Wire Stages:
Lower for HTG
Higher for CLG
Wire Stages:
Lower for HTG
Higher for CLG
2 Stage Thermostat
STAGE4
STAGE3
230VAC 10(3)A
VOLT FREE
2 Stage Thermostat
www.electrocontrols.co.uk
NC1 NO2
C1N NC2
NO1 C2C1
P0
230VAC 10(3)A
VOLT FREE
2 Stage Thermostat
NO1L
P0
PB
±4ºC
±4ºC
RL1
RL2
RL1
RL2
To select NEUTRAL To
select
ZONE
or NEUTRAL ZONE or
hold SET press and hold SET
ETE-2D/50/95, press and
ETE-2D/50/95,
for 3sec.Use to select
for 3sec.Use
N. ZONE to select N. ZONE
and to select ETE-2D/50/95.
and toPress
select
Press SET to exit.
to exit.
ETE-2D/50/95.
SET
ETE-2D
PA
PR
P0
S1
0V/
D0
S1
NC1
N
Electro Controls
ETE-2D
STAGE3
STAGE2
S2
S1
STAGE2
STAGE2
STAGE1
D1
Wire Stages:
D1
Lower for HTG
CLG
Higher forS2
RL1
L
STAGE1
STAGE1
0V/
D0
P0
PB
°C/°F
PA
PR
P4
PA
N1
PR
P4
STAGE2
50/60Hz
0V/
D0
50/60Hz
EXT
POT
108 mm
P4
PA
N1
PR
STAGE2
STAGE1
Wire Stages:
Lower for HTG
Higher for CLG
EXT
POT
EXT
POT
P0
°C/°F
PB
SET
To select NEUTRAL ZONE or
ETE-4D/50/95, press and hold SET
for 3sec.Use to select NEUTRAL ZONE
and to select ETE-4D/50/95. Press SET to exit.
±4ºC
P0
PB
±4ºC
EXT
POT
PA
PR
35mm
°C/°F
Wire Stages:
Lower for HTG
Higher for CLG
±4ºC
PB
PA
PR
D1
P4
S2
N1
BLACK TEKNIGAS & ELECTRO CONTROLS LTD
108 mm 108 mm
BLACK TEKNIGAS & ELECTRO
BLACK
TEKNIGAS
CONTROLS
LTD & ELECTRO CONTROLS LTD
Electro Controls
STAGE1
140mm
Wire Stages:
Lower for HTG
Higher for CLG
230VAC 10(3)A
VOLT FREE
PB SET
°C/°F
To select NEUTRAL ZONE or To select NEUTRAL ZONE or
ETE-4D/50/95, press and hold SET
ETE-4D/50/95, press and hold SET
Use to select NEUTRAL ZONE
for 3sec.Use to select NEUTRAL
for 3sec.
ZONE
and to select ETE-4D/50/95. Press
and SET
to to
select
exit. ETE-4D/50/95. Press SET to exit.
24mm
35mm
SET
BLACK TEKNIGAS & ELECTRO CONTROLS LTD
°C/°F
SET
EXT
POT
°C/°F
SET
To select NEUTRAL ZONE or
ETE-2D/50/95, press and hold SET
for 3sec.Use to select N. ZONE
and to select ETE-2D/50/95. Press SET to exit.
93mm
35mm
140mm
±4ºC
SET
140mm
24mm
BLACK TEKNIGAS & ELECTRO
BLACK
TEKNIGAS
CONTROLS
LTD & ELECTRO CONTROLS LTD
93mm
50/60Hz
93mm
35mm
35mm
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
Connections
L+ and N-
NC,NO,C
S1 and S2
0V and N1
PA and PB
35mm
P4 and P0
P0 and PR
D1 and D0
230VAC or 24VAC/DC supply
Volt free relay connections
Sensor
Night setback
E10-S110 Remote set point adjuster
E10-P4
E10-P50 or E10-P95
E10-T
Thermostats - Electronic
Section 02
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS:
Type
ETE-2D ETE-4D
ETE-6D and 8D 2 holes on diagonal at 117.15mm centres
2 holes on diagonal at 134.5mm centres
3 holes, X dim 215mm centres, Y dim 100mm centres
TIMING DIAGRAM:
The diagram below shows an example on the ETE-4D relay states with rising and falling temperatures for the situation with the Neutral Zone set at 2 stages of
heating and 2 stages of cooling.
TIMING DIAGRAM:
EXAMPLE: ETE-4D
NEUTRAL ZONE
= ON
HTG< 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 > CLG
x x x x
= OFF
DIFFERENTIAL PER STAGE(DPS) = 3°C
DIFFERENCE B/W STAGES (DBS) = 2°C;
STAGE1
DPS1
SETPOINT= 20°C
DBS1-2
STAGE1 ON
DBS2-3
DPS2
STAGE2
STAGE3
STAGE4
TEMP(°C)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20 21
(SP)
22
TEMPERATURE FALLING
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
29
30
TEMPERATURE FALLING
STAGE1
STAGE2
DBS2-3
STAGE3
DPS3
DBS3-4
STAGE4
DPS4
TEMP(°C)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
TEMPERATURE RISING
SET UP:
18
19
20 21
(SP)
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
TEMPERATURE RISING
Turn on the power. Momentarily the display will show all the screen characters then the Product mode EtE4D (if the product is ETE-4D),
EtE50 or ete95 and will settle to show the NEUTRAL ZONE, TEMPERATURE and the actual temperature. This is the main menu or Temperature
screen.
To select the NEUTRAL ZONE (the number of HTG/CLG stages) and one of the Product modes ETE4D, ETE50 or ETE95, press the SET button
for 3 sec. The NEUTRAL ZONE cursor ( ▌ ) and the last selected Product e.g. if the product is ETE-4D, ete4d mode will blink.
Use ▲ button to select the NEUTRAL ZONE required.
Use ▼ button to select either ETE4D, ETE50 or ETE95.
Press SET briefly to exit.
Briefly press SET repeatedly to select the required parameters of SET POINT, NIGHT SETBACK, TIME DELAY, DIFFERENTIAL PER STAGE and DIFFERENCE
B/W STAGES. The numerical values of these parameters will be blinking and the ▲▼ buttons can be used to set the numerical value required.
Whilst setting any parameter if the buttons are left for 10 sec the screen will return to the Temperature screen.
In the Temperature screen use of the ▲▼ buttons will toggle between °C and °F if required.
SEN0P
SENs Lo/ ErrPA
Sensor open circuit.
Sensor short circuit
Set temperature below or above product range
E10-S110 short circuit (ETE-2/4/6/8D only). Once this problem has been addressed press SET to revert to normal operation.
Observe the local regulations regarding electrical installations.
Size the power supply cables according to the load.
The minimum sensor cable size is 7/0.2mm with a max length of 100m. screened cable is recommended and the screen should be earthed at
the controller end only.
Keep supply and sensor cables away from other power cables and devices which may cause interference.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
17
Thermostats - Electronic
ELECTRONIC THERMOSTAT/THERMOMETER WITH DISPLAY
ETE-D4/D6
Volt free contacts
Accuracy approx 1% of range
Both products are Front Panel mounted with
a digital display which indicates the sensed
temperature.
The ETE-D4 is suitable for controlling valves,
motors, fans etc and heating or cooling
devices.
Type ETE-D6 is a STAND ALONE
THERMOMETER.
ORDER DISPLAY UNIT + SENSOR ONLY
ETE-D4
For use with E10.. SENSORS ONLY SEE SEPARATE DATA SHEET
ETE-D6
NOT for use with E10.. REMOTE
ADJUSTERS & DISPLAY units
or ETE.. THERMOSTATS
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-V2
Type Description
Stages Display Range ° C Diff °C Supply 230VAC
Power
SelectableSPDT
Consumption
Mounting
Enclosure
ETE-D4 Thermostat
1
Digital -10/+50 or 25/95 0.5/10 adj 230VAC
10(3)A
3.3VA
Front Panel
IP00
ETE-D6 Thermometer
–
Digital
-10/+50 or 25/95
–
230VAC
–
3.3VA Front Panel
IP00
OPTIONAL L24 = 24VAC supply
DIMENSIONS
ETE-D4/D6
96
104
°C
91
WIRING
TERMINALS
48
PANEL CUT OUT
44
95
Fixing brackets & screws are provided.
WIRING:
ETE-D6
SENSOR
S1
S2
4
0
F
E
8
L
C
N
Rotary switch: To select the temperature range:
Position E -10/+50 C
Position F 25/95 C
WIRING:
ETE-D4
SENSOR
S1
S2
0
F
E
_
+
4
8
L
N
NC
NO
C
C
On increase to the setpoint C-NO makes
On decrease (diff) C-NC makes
+T
Rotary switch : To select the temperature range
Position E -10/+50 C
Position F 25/95 C
ADJUSTMENT:
D4
ETE-D4
Press either button on the front panel and the current Setpoint is displayed. Adjust to the required value by pressing the
buttons (left = decrease, right = increase) The Diff is then displayed which can also be adjusted in the same way, if required.
After the adjustments have been made, the sensed temperature will be displayed automatically.
INSTALLATION:
18
ETE-D4/D6
Terminals 0.5-2.5mmSensor / control signal cable size 7/0 . 2 m m Max length 100m
Screened cable is recommended. The screen should be earthed at controller end only.
Keep sensor/control signal wires away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
Temperature Controllers 0-10VDC
Section 03
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS 0-10VDC PROPORTIONAL 1 - 2 STAGES
ETC..
These products can monitor the temperature
inside buildings, rooms, ducts (return air),
tanks, pipes etc and give a 0-10vdc output
signal linear across the desired proportional
band. Suitable to control damper motors,
valve actuators, step controls, relay modules
& thyristors etc. The duct unit should be
mounted in the return air. If multi-stages of
heating and cooling are required, use the
ETC. 52 and 2 sets of relay modules
ie. 2 x E2RM etc.
NTC thermistor sensor
Supply 24VAC/DC ±15%
ETC-R
Power consumption 15mA
Load >10KΩ
ETC-D
Adjustment under the cover
Enclosure Flammability
ETC-R.. = UL94-HB
ETC-D, ETC-I = UL94-V0
ETC-I
ETC-R..V
Type Mounting Range °C Prop Band °C
Neutral Zone
°C
ETC-R50 ETC-R52 Room Room 0/+50 0/+50 1/10 adj. 1/10 adj. -
1/6 adj.
0-10vdc
2x0-10vdc
ETC-R30V ETC-R32V Room Room 15/30 15/30 1/10 adj. 1/10 adj.
-
1/6 adj.
ETC-D50 ETC-D52 ETC-D95 Duct Duct Duct -10/+50 -10/+50 25/95 1/10 adj. -
1/10 adj. 1/6 adj.
1/10 adj. ETC-II50 ETC-I95 Immersion Immersion -10/+50 25/95 1/10 adj. 1/10 adj.
DIMENSIONS
Output
Function
Signal
Sensor
NTC
Enclosure
Htg or Clg
Htg + Clg
In-built
In-built
IP30
IP30
0-10vdc
2x0-10vdc
Htg or Clg
Htg + Clg
In-built
In-built
IP30
IP30
0-10vdc
2x0-10vdc
0-10vdc
Htg or Clg
Htg + Clg
Htg or Clg
In-built
In-built
In-built
IP65
IP65
IP65
0-10vdc
0-10vdc
Htg or Clg
Htg or Clg
In-built
In-built
IP65
IP65
-
-
ORDER POCKET SEPARATELY – SEE BELOW
ETC-I.. Approx 80dia x 55 Probe length 120mm
ETC-R..85H x 85W x 30D Can be mounted on square or round outlet box
ETC-D..Approx 80dia x 55 Probe length 160mm
ACCESSORIES:
EE-2B ½” BSP x 120mm Brass pocket for ETC-I..
120
EE-STK½” BSP x 120mm Stainless Steel pocket for ETC-I..
6.2 ID
1
2
" BSPT
WIRING:
1 Stage
HTG or CLG
5
1
PROP BAND
= 5°C
2 Stage
5
0vdc
10vdc
HTG
10
-10
1
15°C
20
SET POINT
= 20°C
PROP BAND
= 5°C
SET POINT
= 20°C
-10
CLG
50
10
20
25°C
20°C
NEUTRAL ZONE 2°C
13°C
19°C
PROP BAND 6°C
HTG
0vdc
10vdc
20°C
27°C
21°C
PROP BAND 6°C
CLG
0vdc
10vdc
3
10vdc
0vdc
WIRING:
50
HTG + CLG
1
ETC..
6
NEUTRAL ZONE
= 2°C
4
0-10vdc
HTG
3
0-10vdc
CLG
2
24vac/dc
1
INSTALLATION:
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm² Max length 100m. 0V
Sensor cable size 7/0.2mm Screened cable is recommended. Keep away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
The screen should be earthed at the controller end only .
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
19
Temperature Controllers 0-10VDC
PROPORTIONAL/INTEGRAL 1,2 OR 3 OUTPUTS
E15-PTL…
Temperature range -10 to +95°C
The E15 Temperature Controller is a fully digital controller
which has 1, 2 or 3 0-10VDC proportional outputs.
Integral, Low Limit and Night Setback is standard.
Night Setback is via external time switch (not provided).
A clear LCD display is provided to guide the user
through set up and verification.
Temperature Sensors from the E10 family should be
selected and accessories such as a Digital Set Point
Adjuster, Digital Display and Room Sensors are available.
This product is compatible with the functions and
accessories of the E13 family. See the Accessories
section of this data sheet for more information.
Type E15-PTL1 Proportional band
0.5 to 50°C
Dead Band
0 to 15°C
Integral time
0 to 500 seconds
Low limit setting
0 to 30°C
Night setback
0 to 40°C (Ext. Time Switch)
Temp. Resolution
0.5°C
Power supply
24VAC/DC +/-15%
Power Consumption2VA (without accessories)
IP rating
IP00
Outputs
Functions
Mounting
Protection
1 x 0-10VDC
HTG or CLG
Din Rail
IP00
HTG + CLG
HTG + HTG or CLG +CLG
Din Rail
IP00
Din Rail
IP00
E15-PTL2 2 x 0-10VDC
E15-PTL3 3 x 0-10VDC
CLG + CLG + CLG
HTG + CLG + CLG
HTG + HTG + CLG
HTG + HTG + HTG
Note: If Low Limit Sensor is connected, only one Heating output will be available
DIMENSIONS/TERMINATION:
EXAMPLE TEMPERATURE DIAGRAMS:
Example : E15-PTL1
SET POINT 20ϒC
PROP BAND 3ϒC
DISPLAY
OUTPUT/
TEMP
17ϒC
Htg or Clg
20ϒC
HTG
10V
0V
Exampl e : E15-PTL 2
SET POINT 20ϒC
www.electrocontrols.co.uk
16ϒC1 HTG
DEAD BAND 2ϒC
0V
23ϒC
CLG
PROP BAND
0V
10V
Htg +Clg
9ϒC2
PROP BAND
10V
PROP BAND 3ϒC
20ϒC
OR
PROP BAND
0ϒC2
1ϒC2 CLG
DEAD BAND 2ϒC
4ϒC
PROP BAND
0V
10V
SET
Exampl e : E15-PTL 3
SET POINT 20ϒC
TEMP SENSORS
SET for
to
E10-TD
PCOM1P COM1
PA PB
NIGHT FLOWO
EXTP OT
UTSIDE
+24V 0V 0V N1 S1 S0 SL PR P0 P4 PB PA D0 D1 0V
Y1 Y2 Y3
HTG/CLG
DEAD BAND 2ϒC
PROP BAND 3ϒC
SEN LOW
MAIN LIM
P50
P95
P4
4
E10-R
D
E10-S
110
E10-T
E10-TL24
PROP BAND
10V
0V
0ϒC2
Htg +Clg+Cl g
1ϒC
DEAD BAND 2ϒC
CLG
24ϒC
PROP BAND
0V
26ϒC
DEAD BAND 2ϒC
CLG
29ϒC
PROP BAND
0V
10V
10V
Exampl e: E15-PTL1 Low Limit Mod e
LOW LIMIT SENSOR
5mA/OUTPUT
PROP BAND 6ϒC
LOW LIMIT 15ϒC
SET UP:
9ϒC2
SET
information,
AC/DC
16ϒC1 HTG
10vdc
HTG
9ϒC1
0vdc
15ϒC
CONTROL SENSOR
10vdc
0vdc
HTG
7ϒC2
2ϒC2
SET POINT 22ϒC
7ϒC
PROP BAND 5ϒC
Turn on the controller. Momentarily the display will show all the screen characters then the Product mode E 15 P1, E 13 P1 or E 13 P4
(only available in the E15-PTL1).
Press and hold the SET button for 3 seconds. The SET CONTROL MODE: will be displayed. Press the▼button to toggle between the E15 and
E13, and▲button repeatedly to change the HTG/CLG mode required. Press SET to confirm the selection.
Briefly press SET repeatedly to select the required parameters i.e. SET POINT, PROP BAND, DEADBAND, INTEGRAL, LOW LIMIT, LOW LIMIT
PROP BAND (if Low Limit Sensor is connected) and NIGHT SETBACK. The ▲▼ buttons can be used to set numerical value required.
Whilst setting the parameters, if the buttons are left for 10 seconds, the screen will return to the Temperature screen.
In the Temperature screen use ▲▼ buttons repeatedly to show TEMPERATURE LOW LIMIT (if Low Limit Sensor is connected),
OUTPUT Y1%, Y2% and Y3%.
Reverting to the default settings
Start with the power off.
Hold the▲button down whilst turning on the power.
LOD EF and DEF LD will be displayed.
Turn off the power and turn on again. The controller will now be in its normal state.
Diagnostic messages
ERR S1
Main Sensor short circuit or not connected.
ERR SL
Low Limit Sensor short circuit.
ACCESSORIES: See the table below for the valid accessories:
Accessory type
Accessory Part numberSelected product mode
E15-P1/2/3E13-P1/2/3/4*
Temperature sensors
E10-B/C/D/DA/G/H/I/K/R/RA/S/V/X
3
3
Set Point adjuster
E10-P4,E10-P50 and E10-P95 (E13-P4 mode only)
3
Digital Set Point Adjuster
E10-S110
3
Digital Room sensor
E10-RD
3
Analogue display
E10-T
3
Digital Display
E10-TD
3
EnclosureEE-M2T
3
3
* E13-P4 mode is only available in the E15-PTL1. The E13-PO4 and E13-PT4 are compatible with the E15-PTL1.
INSTALLATION:
20
Sensor cable size 7/0.2mm.Screened cable is recommended with a maximum length of 100metres and earthed at the controller end only.
Route all cables away from other power cables or devices which may cause interference.
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
Temperature Controllers 0-10VDC
Section 03
E14 TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 0-10VDC PRODUCT SELECTION GUIDE
E14…
The E14 Temperature controller is a fully digital controller which can
be configured with 1, 2 or 3 0-10VDC outputs and other features
such as proportional + integral control and low limit. Night setback
is standard.
A clear lcd display is provided to guide the user through set up and
verification. The product is totally enclosed to IP54 as standard.
Temperature sensors from the E10 family should be selected and
accessories such as a Digital Setpoint Adjuster and Digital Display
are available for use with the E14.
E14-P..
Selection guide:
Basic controller with proportional
control and a single 0-10VDC output
E14-P1
Htg or Clg
With additional outputs
2 off 0-10VDC outputs
E14-P2
Htg+Clg or Htg+Htg or Clg+Clg
3 off 0-10VDC outputs
E14-P3 Htg+Htg+Htg or Htg+Htg+Clg or
Clg+Clg+Clg or Htg+Clg+Clg
With proportional + integral control for
E14-P1I E14-P2I Htg or Clg
Htg+ Clg or Htg+Htg or Clg+Clg
E14-P3I Htg+Htg+Htg or Htg+Htg+Clg or
Clg+Clg+Clg or Htg+Clg+Clg
With Low Limit temperature control
E14-P1LL
Htg only
E14-P2LL
Htg + Clg
E14-P3LL
Htg + Clg + Clg
Add the sensors required-see page ……..
Add the accessories
Digital Set point adjuster
Digital Display
E10-S110
E10-TD
Room Sensor
E10-RD
Compensator version
E14-PCOM1
Add the sensors required (two)
Add the accessories
Digital flow setpoint adjuster
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
21
Temperature Controllers 0-10VDC
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 0-10VDC
E14-P..
The E14 Temperature controller is a fully
digital controller which can be configured
with 1, 2 or 3 0-10VDC outputs and other
optional features such as proportional
+ integral control and low limit. Night
setback is standard (time switch not
provided).
Supply24VAC/DC
Temp range
-20 to 110deg C
Temp resolution
0.1deg C
Prop band
1 to 15degC
Dead band
0 to 10degC
Integral time
Output
Output resolution
Night setback range
IP rating
A clear lcd display is provided to guide
the user through set up and verification.
The product is totally enclosed to IP54 as
standard.
0 to 300s (E14-P..I only)
1,2 or 3 x 0-10VDC
0.1VDC
-20 to 110 deg C
IP54
Temperature sensors from the E10 family
should be selected and accessories such
as a Digital Setpoint Adjuster and Digital
Display and Room Sensor are available for
use with the E14.
DIMENSIONS and WIRING:
Example : E14-P1
158
58
SET POINT 20°C
17°C
PROP BAND 3°C
10V
Htg or Clg
20°C
HTG
0V
Example : E14 - P2
90
SET POINT 20°C
16°C HTG
DEAD BAND 2°C
PROP BAND
DEAD BAND 2°C
^
SET
PROP BAND 3°C
^
16°C HTG
19°C
PROP BAND
10V
20°C
20°C
21°C
0V
10V
Htg +Clg+Clg
21°C
CLG
24°C
PROP BAND
DEAD BAND 2°C
0V
Example: E14-P1LL
26°C
DEAD BAND 2°C
10V
CLG
29°C
PROP BAND
0V
10V
Htg Only
CONTROL SENSOR
PA PB DA DB DT 0V Y1 Y2 Y3
NIGHT
PROP BAND 6°C
10vdc
HTG
0vdc
10vdc
0vdc
HTG
SET POINT 22°C
PROP BAND 5°C
10VDC
10VDC
10VDC
REMOTE
SET POINT
SENSOR
LOW LIMIT (If applicable)
REMOTE
DISPLAY
LOW LIMIT 15°C
SENSOR
24°C
CLG
PROP BAND
DEAD BAND 2°C
0V
LOW LIMIT SENSOR
24V 0V 0V N1 S0 S1 SL AA AB
10V
0V
Example : E14 - P3
SET POINT 20°C
23°C
CLG
PROP BAND
0V
Htg +Clg
19°C
10V
PROP BAND 3°C
20°C
OR
PROP BAND
9°C
15°C
17°C
22°C
27°C
Sensor cables should be screened cable 7/0.2 mm max length 100m with the screen earthed at the controller end only.
SETTINGS:
Setting the Control mode
Whilst holding the
push button turn the power on.
The display will show SET and CONTROL MODE.
to scroll through the modes and confirm with the SET push button the mode required.
Use the
The controller will then begin to operate normally
Setting of Set Point, Proportional band etc
With the temperature indication displayed press the SET push button to step through the desired parameters and the value can be set using the
buttons.
and
By repeatedly pressing the SET button the parameters of:
SET POINT
PROPORTIONAL BAND Y1
PROPORTIONAL BAND Y2 (if applicable)
PROPORTIONAL BAND Y3 (if applicable)
DEADBAND Y1Y2 and Y2Y3 (if applicable)
INTEGRAL TIME (if applicable)
LOW LIMIT
LOW LIMIT PROPORTIONAL BAND
NIGHT SETBACK
can be set up.
After 10s the E14 will come out of the setting menu and operate normally.
Viewing the output data
With the temperature displayed press the
to see the output of Y1displayed. Press the
again for display of the Y2 output (if applicable) and press the
a third time for display of the Y3 output (if applicable).
DC output values are shown in %. i.e 10VDC is 100%
is pressed after the last output display after which the temperature will be displayed.
This display will be maintained until the
Reverting to default settings
Start with the power OFF
pushbutton down whilst turning on the power.
Hold the
LoD and deFLd will be displayed followed by the display of temperature.
Turn off the power and turn on again.The controller will now be in its normal state.
More detailed instructions are shown on the Product Data sheet supplied with the product.
ACCESSORIES
E10…… Temperature sensor Select the type of sensor needed from the E10 range shown on page…….
E10-S110 Digital Setpoint adjuster
E10-TD Digital remote temperature display
22
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
Temperature Controllers 0-10VDC
Section 03
COMPENSATOR 0-10VDC FOR BOILERS OR MIXING VALVES
E14-PCOM1
This compensator can be used to adjust
boiler flow temperature in relation to
changes in outside temperature.
This compensator must be used with an
outside temperature sensor and a flow
temperature sensor.
The 0-10VDC output can be used to
modulate an actuator/mixing valve.
Supply Temp range
Temp resolution
Prop band
Integral time
Output
Output resolution
IP rating
Alternatively the 0-10VDC signal can
be wired to a relay interface unit (E4RM
for example) to switch several boilers in
sequence.
24VAC/DC
-20 to 110 degC
0.1deg C
1 to 40degC
0 to 300s
0-10VDC
0.1VDC
IP54
DIMENSIONS and WIRING
158
58
110
Limit Max Flow Temp Set Point: 80°C
100
90
90
Flow High= 80°[email protected]°C Outside Temperature
^
SET
Flow Temperature
80
^
70
60
Flow Low= 50°[email protected]°C Outside Temperature
50
40
Flow Set [email protected]
10°C Outside Temp
Flow Low= 40°[email protected]°C Outside Temperature
30
Flow Low= 30°[email protected]°C Outside Temperature
20
Flow Low= 20°[email protected]°C Outside Temperature
10
Night Setback
0
24V 0V 0V N1 S0 S1 SL AA AB
PA PB DA DB DT 0V Y1 Y2 Y3
-10
OUTSIDE
SENSOR
10VDC
FLOW
SENSOR
REMOTE
DISPLAY
NIGHT
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
Outside Temperature
Sensor cables should be screened cable 7/0.2mm max length 100m with the screen earthed at the controller end only.
SETTINGS:
Setting the Control mode
Whilst holding the
push button turn the power on.
The display will show SET and CONTROL MODE.
/
to scroll through the modes and confirm with the SET push button the mode required.
Use the
The controller will then begin to operate normally.
Setting of Flow temperatures, Proportional band etc
With the temperature indication displayed press the SET push button to step through the desired parameters and the value can be set using the (up arrow) and
buttons.
By repeatedly pressing the SET button the parameters of:
SET POINT CALCULATED (display only)
PROPORTIONAL BAND Y1
INTEGRAL TIME
FLOW HIGH
FLOW LOW
NIGHT SETBACK
Can be displayed and set up
After 10s the display will revert to the temperature indication.
Note: the set point does not have to be set up because this is calculated from the Flow low and Flow high.
The night setback is an offset subtracted from the calculated set point.
Viewing the output data
With the temperature displayed press the
and the following temperatures will be displayed.
TEMP FLOW
TEMP OUTSIDE
Y1
The DC output value is shown in %. i.e 10VDC is 100%
is pressed after which the temperature will be displayed again.
This display will be maintained until the
Reverting to default settings
Start with the power OFF
pushbutton down whilst turning on the power.
Hold the
LoD and deFLd will be displayed followed by the display of temperature.
Turn off the power and turn on again. The controller will now be in its normal state.
More detailed instructions are shown on the Product Data sheet supplied with the product.
ACCESSORIES
E10-X
E10-I
E10-TD
Outside temperature sensor
Immersion temperature sensor
Digital remote temperature display
Note: The E10-S110 Digital Setpoint adjuster is not available with the E14-PCOM1
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
23
Digital Displays
TRANSMITTER DISPLAY 0-10VDC m/s - mbar - Bar - %RH - C - kPa - Pa etc
EDIG-2
Accuracy approx 1% of range.
These products are Front Panel mounted and
can be used to display the sensed parameter by
receiving a 0-10vdc input from Pressure,
Temperature, Humidity, Flow, Level transmitters
and damper/valve motors.
The display and transmitter range must be
matched. Otherwise use the 0 -10 or 0-100
display range.The display will be linear across
the input range.
Type EDIG-2
Selectable
Display
C
Bar
%RH
kPa
Suitable for use with EDT.. EWT.. EWPT..
EAV.. EHDT.. EHRT.. ED-V040 EI-V110
E08..M E16..M etc.
The ranges are selected via a
16 position switch.
Input current < 0.5mA
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-V2
EDIG-2
Selectable
Supply
Input
Range
m/s mbar
Pa
See chart
24VAC/DC
Power
Consumption
Mounting Enclosure
<3.3VA
Front Panel
IP00
0-10VDC
etc
RANGE CHART:
Switch
Position
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
Display
Range
0-1
0-2
0-3
0-5
0-10
0-16
0-25
0-50
0-100
0-200
0-500
0-999
C
D
E
-10/+40 -10/+110 -10/+50
F
25/95
Example: If the range required is 0-100 mbar, then set the switch position to 8.
At 0vdc input, the display is zero and linear up to 10vdc, when the display will be 100 mbar
THIS PRODUCT CAN ALSO BE USED AS A POSITION INDICATOR FOR 0-10VDC DAMPER / VALVE MOTORS.
DIMENSIONS
EDIG-2
96
104
91
WIRING
TERMINALS
48
PANEL CUT OUT
44
95
Fixing brackets & screws are provided.
A set of labels are included with the following symbols and can be applied to the unit as shown above kPa mbar
Pa
m/s
bar
%RH
C
WIRING:
EDIG-2
0-10VDC
0V
IN
1
0
F
2
E
3 4 5
D C B
6
A
7
8
9
24VAC/DC
+
0V
Rotary switch to select the range required.
INSTALLATION:
24
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm Sensor / control signal cable size 7/0.2mm Max length 100m
Screened cable is recommended The screen should be earthed at controller end only
Keep sensor/control signal wires away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
Digital Displays
Section 04
TRANSMITTER DISPLAY 0-10VDC WITH SET POINT SWITCH
EDIG-4
Accuracy approx 1% of range.
This unit accepts a 0-10VDC signal from
Pressure, Temperature, Humidity, Flow or
Level transmitters and Damper / Valve motors.
The display indicates the sensed parameter
which is linear across the range. A setpoint
and differential can be adjusted to switch a
volt free contact. The range of the transmitter
must match the display range. Otherwise use
the 0-10 or 0-100 display range.
Type EDIG-4 Selectable
Display
C
%RH
Bar
kPa
Suitable for use with EDT.. EWT.. EWPT..
EAV.. EHDT.. EHRT.. ED-V040 EI-V110
E08..M E16..M etc.
The ranges are selected via a
16 postion switch.
Selectable
Range/Setpoint
m/s mbar
Pa
Input current < 0.5mA
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-V2
EDIG-4
Diff
Adj
See chart Supply
Input +-15%
See chart 24VAC/DC 0-10VDC 230VAC
SPDT
Power
Consumption
Mounting Enclosure
10(3) A <3.3VA Front Panel IP00
etc
RANGE CHART:
Switch
Position
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Display Range
0-1
0-2
0-3
0-5
0-10
0-16
0-25
0-50
0-100
0-200
Diff adj.
0.1-0.9
0.1-1.9
0.1-2.9
0.1-4.9
0.1-9.9
0.1-15
0.1-24
0.5-49
1-99
1-199
Switch
Position
A
b
C
D
E
F
Display Range
0-500
0-999
-10 / +40
-10 / +110
-10 / +50
25/95
Diff adj.
1-499
1-900
0.5-40
0.5-40
0.5-40
0.5-40
DIMENSIONS
Example:
If the range required is 0-100mbar,
set the switch position to 8.
At 0vdc input, the display is zero and
linear up to 10vdc, when the display
will be 100mbar. The switch point &
differential is adjustable
EDIG-4
EDIG4
96
104
91
C
WIRING
TERMINALS
48
44
PANEL CUT OUT
95
Fixing brackets & screws are provided.
A set of labels are included with the following symbols and can be applied to the unit as shown above - kPa mbar
ADJUSTMENT:
Pa
m/s
bar
%RH
C
Press either button on the front panel and the current Setpoint is displayed. Adjust to the required value by pressing the buttons
(left =decrease, right = increase) The Diff is then displayed which can also be adjusted in the same way, if required.
After the adjustments have been made, the sensed parameter will be displayed automatically.
EDIG-4
WIRING:
0-10VDC
OV
IN
1
0
F
2
E
3
D
4
5
C B
6
A
7
8
9
24VAC/DC
+
0V
NC
NO
C
On increase to the setpoint C-NC m akes
On decrease (diff) C-NO m akes
Rotary switch to select
the range required.
INSTALLATION:
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm Sensor / control signal cable size 7/0.2mm Screened cable is recommended The screen should be earthed at controller end only
Keep sensor/control signal wires away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
Max length 100m
25
Thyristor Controls
THYRISTOR CONTROLS SINGLE PHASE 0-10VDC
EY1..
For other voltages DO NOT exceed
the fuse rating.
These thyristor controls accept 0-10vdc
input signals from temperature controllers
to regulate the current flow to electric
heaters or other resistive loads in order to
achieve accurate proportional control. The
unit operates on the burst fire zero voltage
switched principle. Zero voltage switching
for minimum RFI. Burst firing for minimum
harmonic distortion. The full load is
switched on & off in timed bursts and is
proportional to the input signal.
The EY1-1.5 does not have an internal fuse.
A high speed semi-conductor fuse should be
fitted externally.
All other units have fast semi-conductor fuses to
protect against short circuit & overload.
EY1-1.5
Max. ambient is 40°C - derate 20% at 50°C.
Aluminium body with cooling fins.
Metal cover
EY1-3 / EY1-7 / EY1-12
Type
Phase Max Heater Supply Duty kW VAC Hz
Internal
Fuse
Dissipated Heat
(Watts)
Load
Mounting
Protection
EY1-1.5 1
1.5 230 50/60 -
1.5 x load current
>100KΩ
Din Rail
IP00
EY1-3
1
3.5 230 50/60 20A
1.5 x load current
>100KΩ
Din Rail
IP00
EY1-7
1
7.0
230 50/60 35A
1.5 x load current
>100KΩ
Din Rail
IP00
1
12.5 230 50/60 100A
1.5 x load current
>100KΩ
Bracket
IP00
EY1-12
Ensure unit is adequately ventilated to dissipate internally generated heat.
For use with 0-10vdc temperature controllers - see separate data sheet.
DIMENSIONS
Type
H
W
D
Weight
(Kg)
EY1-1.5
82
90
50
0.14
EY1-3
150
90
65
0.64
EY1-7
150
102
102
1.15
EY1-12
200
112
146
2.19
WIRING:
W
D
H
EY1..
LIVE
IN
230VAC
OUT
NEUTRAL
OUT
INPUT
IN
IN
0V
0 - 10vdc
L
N
For Normal use the MAN/AUTO link should be on AUTO
On 0-10vdc input, both the ground (OV) & signal wires must be connected. If the input signal is cut the thyristor output will be zero.
During long ‘off ’ periods the power supply to the thyristor should be turned off. Heaters should be protected with a high temp cut-out.
Select a thyristor allowing for heater battery & supply voltage tolerances which may cause the current to increase by approx 20%.
Note the fuse ratings. One internal fuse is fitted to protect the thyristor only. All cables & external fuses must be fitted according to
local regulations & safety requirements.
Load terminal size:
EY1-1.5 / EY1-3
1.5mm²
EY1-7 2.5mm²
EY1-12 10mm²
Input signal terminal size 0.5-2.5mm²
Min sensor / control signal cable size 7/0.2mm
Max length 100m.
The screen should be earthed at controller end only.
Keep sensor/control signal wires away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
Screened cable is recommended.
INSTALLATION:
FAULT FINDING:
26
Allow 25mm clearance on horizontal axis & 100mm on vertical axis between units. Fit grilles or louvres to the top & bottom of any enclosures.
Install with the cooling fins vertically - Forced ventilation may be necessary. Air must be allowed to flow freely through the unit.
Do not exceed the maximum ambient temperature.
Check the 0-10Vdc input ground & signal wires are in the correct terminals.
If the internal fuse is blowing : Check the fuse rating & ensure the fuse is screwed down tightly.
Check all terminals & wiring connections are TIGHT. Loose connections can cause bad contact/arcing or the terminal to overheat.
Check electric heater or load rating. Check other units which may cause excessive current to be drawn.
Check for short circuit on wiring or heater. Check supply voltage variations.
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
Thyristor Controls
Section 05
THYRISTOR CONTROLS 3 PHASE 0-10VDC
EY3..
For other voltages DO NOT exceed
the fuse rating.
These thyristor controls accept 0-10vdc input
signals from temperature controllers to regulate
the current flow to electric heaters or
other resistive loads in order to achieve
accurate proportional control. The unit operates
on burst fire zero voltage switched principle.
Zero voltage switching for minimum RFI. Burst
firing for minimum harmonic distortion. The
full load is switched on & off in timed bursts
and is proportional to the input signal.
Fitted with fast semi-conductor fuses
to protect against short circuit & overload.
Max. ambient is 40°C - derate 20% at 50°C.
Aluminium body with cooling fins.
Metal cover
Ensure unit is adequately ventilated to
dissipate internally generated heat.
Load > 100KΩ.
EY3..
Type
Phase EY3-10
EY3-20
EY3-28
EY3-36
EY3-54
EY3-86
EY3-105
EY3-150
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Max Heater Supply Duty kW VAC Hz
10
20
28
36
54
86
105
150
415
415
415
415
415
415
415
415
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
50/60
Internal
Fuse
Dissipated Heat
(Watts)
Thermal
Cut-Out
Mounting
Protection
20A
50A
100A
100A
100A
2x100A
315A
315A
3 x load current
3 x load current
3 x load current
3 x load current
3 x load current
3 x load current
3 x load current
3 x load current
-
-
-
-
In built
In built
In built
In built
Din Rail
Din Rail
Din Rail
Din Rail
Bracket
Bracket
Bracket
Bracket
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
For use with 0-10vdc temperature controllers - see separate data sheet. Replacement fuses available on request.
DIMENSIONS
Type
EY3-10
EY3-20
EY3-28
EY3-36
H
150
150
150
200
W
150
150
153
265
D
63.5
88
126
160
Weight (Kg)
1.0
1.49
2.29
6.39
Type
EY3-54
EY3-86
EY3-105
EY3-150
H
200
200
250
230
W
265
265
265
345
D
160
160
160
242
Weight (Kg)
6.39
6.99
8.69
16.00
WIRING:
For Normal use the MAN/AUTO link should be on AUTO. In MANUAL the potentiometer is used to regulate the output.
No mains neutral connection should be made to the heater. L1 & L3 switch the current to the heater. L2 is permanently connected.
The load must be split EQUALLY on all phases.
During long 'off' periods the power supply to the thyristor should be turned off.
Heater batteries should be protected with a high temperature cut-out.
On 0-10vdc input both the ground (OV) & signal wires must be connected. If the input signal is cut the thyristor output will be zero.
Select a thyristor allowing for heater battery & supply voltage tolerances which may cause the current to increase by approx 20%.
Note the fuse ratings.
Two internal fuses are fitted to protect the thyristor only.
Min sensor / control signal cable size 7/0.2mm.
Max length 100m.
Two screen should be earthed at controller end only.
Keep sensor/control signal wires away from power cables/units which may cause interference. Screened cable is recommended.
All cables & external fuses must be fitted according to local regulations & safety requirements.
Input signal terminals 0.5-150mm²
Load terminal sizes :
EY3-10 – 1.5mm² EY3-20 – 2.5mm²
EY3-54 – 16mm² EY3-86 – 25mm²
INSTALLATION:
FAULT FINDING:
EY3-28 – 4mm²
EY3-105 – 35mm
EY3-36 – 10mm²
EY3-150 – 70mm²
Allow 25mm clearance on horizontal axis & 100mm on vertical axis between units. Fit grilles or louvres to the top or bottom of any enclosures.
Install with cooling fins vertically - Forced ventilation may be necessary. Air must be allowed to flow freely through the unit.
Do not exceed the maximum ambient temperature.
Check the 0-10Vdc input ground & signal wires are in the correct terminals.
If the internal fuse is blowing : Check the fuse rating & ensure the fuse is screwed down tightly.
Check all terminals & wiring connections are TIGHT. Loose connections can cause bad contact/arcing or the terminal to overheat.
Check electric heater or load rating. Check other units which may cause excessive current to be drawn.
Check for short circuit on wiring or heater. Check supply voltage variations.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
27
Fan Speed Controls
MOTOR SELECTION GUIDE For Fan Speed Controls
When selecting a control to operate the
speed of fan or pump motors, it is
essential to consider a number of
important factors. The data herein is
only a brief overview. It is not intended
to provide the full technical details on
the selection of fans or motors. To
avoid doubt the fan or motor
manufacturer should be consulted for
guidance.
FAN SPEED CONTROLS
MTY..
STL.. EVS..
STR.. STR4.. Potentiometer Potentiometer 0-10VDC Input
Transformer Transformer 1 Phase Fans
1 Phase Fans 1 Phase Fans 1 Phase Fans 3 Phase Fans Manual Control
Manual Control
Automatic Control
5 Step Manual Control
5 Step Manual Control
Fan Speed Controls are also available for use with:
- Motors with TK thermal cut-out.
- Differential Pressure Transmitters.
- Temperature Operated.
FAN SUITABILITY
Propeller, Centrifugal and Axial.
FAN MOTOR SELECTION
Motors must be capable of running at reduced speeds and voltages.
Suitable types are split capacitor, shaded pole and 6 or 8 pole motors.
4 pole motors are most suitable as they operate over a wider control range.
2 pole motors are difficult to control <600 rpm and have poor starting performance at reduced voltages.
(This may not be problem when the 5 step fan speed controller is used)
High resistance rotors are ideal and give more stable linear characteristics.
These fan speed controls are generally not suitable for pump motor control.
TEMPERATURE
Use Class F rated rotor windings which can withstand temperatures up to 155°C.
Running at low speeds can increase the motor temperature. Motors should be air cooled.
A larger frame size may be necessary to dissipate the extra heat generated when running at low speeds.
Motor thermal protection is recommended.
The fan speed controls are rated at 30°C ambient. The nominal current should be de-rated by 2% per 1°C increase up to a max of 40°C.
LOAD PERFORMANCE
The motor size should be matched to the impeller load.
Optimum speed control is achieved when the motor load absorbs at least 75% of the rated nominal motor power when running at full speed.
The fan speed control nominal current should be greater than the nominal motor running current.
Several motors can be wired to one fan speed control but the current limits must not be exceeded.
Note that the running current on most motors can increase by approx 20% when the speed is reduced
28
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
Fan Speed Controls
Section 06
FAN SPEED CONTROLS 230VAC 1 PHASE MANUAL OPERATION
MTY.. STL..
STL..
These electronic controls are used to manually
adjust the speed of motors via a max - min
adjusting knob on the front which
reduces/increases the supply voltage to the
motor. Before selecting a control its
compatibility must be ensured. Please read the
Motor Selection Guide on a separate data sheet.
When the unit is switched on and also
when power is re-applied (with the speed
control switch already in the on position),
it will run up to the speed that is set by the
potentiometer position.
MTY..
Type Nominal Current
Supply
50-60Hz
Fast Blow Fuse
Start Sequence
Type “F” Fitted
MTY-0-05-AT
MTY-0-10-AT
MTY-0-20-AT
MTY-0-40-AT
STL-0-15-AT STL-0-30-AT
STL-0-50-AT
STL-0-60-AT
STL-0-100-AT
0.5A
1A
2A
4A
230Vac
230Vac
230Vac
230Vac
630mA
1.25A
2.5A
5A
1.5A
3A
5A
6A
10A
230Vac
230Vac
230Vac
230Vac
230Vac
3A
5A
8A
8A
14A
Manual Speed
Adjustment
Mounting
Enclosure
Pot Position
Pot Position
Pot Position
Pot Position
Internal pot
Internal pot
Internal pot
Internal pot
Surface and flush
Surface and flush
Surface and flush
Surface
IP44
IP44
IP44
IP54
Pot Position
Pot Position
Pot Position
Pot Position
Pot Position
Internal pot
Internal pot
Internal pot
Internal pot
Internal pot
Surface
Surface
Surface
Surface
Surface
IP54
IP54
IP54
IP54
IP54
Minimum Speed can be set via the internal trim potentiometer.
The maximum current is based on max ambient of 30 C. Enclosure : Plastic.
Several motors can be connected at once as long as the speed control’s maximum current is not exceeded. Suitable for 2 or 3 wire motors.
The Speed Control’s maximum current must be just larger than the nominal motor running current. Start current can be 3 x nominal current.
MTY..
65
DIMENSIONS
82
On/off switch when Pot
fully anti-clockwise
32
82
1A
IP44
24
Surface Mount
Flush Mount
Electrical entry is possible from the bottom or from the back.
kg
STL-0-15-AT
STL-0-30-AT STL-0-50-AT STL-0-60-AT
0.325
0.350
A
B
C
D
E
0.440
STL-0-100-AT
0.650
0.710
160
195
83
115
88
95
71
98
108
140
STL..
C
On/Off
illuminated
switch
D
B
Min Speed
STL..
Drilling Data
IP54
Mount vertically to allow free
ventilation
L - Live supply via On/Off switch: 230Vac
MT...
E
A
Cable Entry
WIRING:
THE POT ON STL..
CAN BE REMOVED
FOR FRONT PANEL
MOUNTING
50X50
STL...
Min Speed
F- Fuse-box with spare fuse (Ceramic, Type "F")
L- Controlled live output to motor
F
N
N
U
L1
L
N
M
L1- Non controlled live output 230Vac for 3 wire
motors, or it can be used as a live supply to the
controller, bypassing the On/Off switch which is
incorporated in the turning knob/potentiometer.
All cables, isolators & external fuses must be
fitted according to local regulations, safety &
motor manufacturers requirements.
L
230Vac
50/60Hz
N
L1
N
Motor
U
L1 : Live supply bypassing the Fuse & On/Off
switch (which is on the side) or it can be
used as a supply for 3 wire motors.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
29
Fan Speed Controls
FAN SPEED CONTROLS 230VAC 1 PHASE 0-10VDC INPUT
EVS..
Suitable for 2 or 3 wire motors
Minimum Speed can be set via the internal trim
potentiometer
Enclosure : Plastic
Unit can be switched on/off via the illuminated
switch on the side
Start current can be 3 x nominal current.
Several motors can be connected at once as long
as the speed control's maximum current is not
exceeded. The maximum current is based on a
maximum ambient temperature of 30 C.
These units accept 0-10vdc input signal and
control the voltage output to a fan motor. As
the 0-10vdc signal increases or decreases
the motor speed operates respectively.
Before selecting a control its compatibility
must be ensured. Please read the Motor
Selection Guide on a separate data sheet.
EVS..
Type Nominal
Current
Supply
50-60Hz
Fast Blow Fuse
Type “F” Fitted
Input
Signal
Start Sequence
Adjustment
Min Speed
Adjustment
Mounting
Enclosure
EVS-0-15-DT
1.5A
230Vac
3A
0-10VDC
As input signal
Via internal pot
Wall
IP54
EVS-0-30-DT
3A
230Vac
3A
0-10VDC
As input signal
Via internal pot
Wall
IP54
EVS-0-60-DT
6A
230Vac
6A
0-10VDC
As input signal
Via internal pot
Wall
IP54
EVS-0100-DT
10A
230Vac
14A
0-10VDC
As input signal
Via internal pot
Wall
IP54
The selected Speed Control's maximum current must be just larger than the nominal motor running current.
When the input signal is cut, the unit reverts to the minimum speed set via the trim pot. Factory set at 100VAC.
If the trim pot is set to 0, the fan speed will be zero.
DIMENSIONS
EVS..
98
115
85
140
180
On / Off
Switch
IP54
Drilling Data
MODEL
WEIGHT(kg)
EVS-0-15-DT
EVS-0-30-DT
EVS-0-60-DT
EVS-0100-DT
0.69
0.740
0.900
0.900
WIRING:
Mount vertically to allow free
ventilation around the unit
SETTINGS:
Dip switches
Minimum speed down
adjustment
16 Input voltage
0-10VDC
0-10 Vdc
4-20mA
N
L
N
L1
230Vac
50/60Hz
Motor
~
Selector
Switch
up10-0VDC
17 Off level
down disable off level
up
enable off level
18 Kick start
+
- 0V
0-10 Vdc
19 Current/Voltage
4-20mA
Selection
down disable kick start
up
enable kick start
down4-20mA
up0-10VDC
Potentiometers
L - Live supply via On/ Off switch & fuse
L1 - Live supply bypassing the On/Off switch
& fuse or it can be used as a supply for 3
wire motors.
20 Level adjustment
0-4V or 10-6V depending on
Switch 16 selection
21
Min speed adjust
60-160V
22
Max speed adjust
165-230V
All cables, isolators & external fuses etc must be fitted according to local regulations, safety & motor manufacturers requirements.
Min Sensor / control signal cable size 7/0.2mm
Max length 100m.
The screen should be earthed at control end only.
Keep sensor / control signal wires away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
Screened cable is recommended.
30
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
Fan Speed Controls
Section 06
FAN SPEED CONTROLS 230VAC 1 PHASE 5 SPEED MANUAL OPERATION
STR..
These transformer controls
vary the speed of fan motors
via a 1-5 step manual selector
knob on the front which
decreases or increases the
supply voltage to the motor.
Before selecting a control its
compatibility must be ensured.
Please read the Motor
Selection Guide on a separate
data sheet.
Type Nominal
Current
Suitable for 2 or 3 wire motors
Power-On Lamp
Internal fast blow fuse “F” type
Start current can be 3 x nominal current.
When the unit is switched on and also when power is re-applied (with
the speed control switch already in the on position), it will run up to
the speed that is set by the knob position. The maximum current is
based on max ambient of 30oC.
The selected Speed Control’s maximum current must be just larger
than the nominal motor running current.
Several motors can be connected at once - do not exceed the speed
control’s current rating.
STR..
SupplyFast Blow Fuse “F”
50-60Hz
5x206x32mm
Start
Sequence
Manual Speed
Adjustment
Mounting
Case
Enclosure
STR-1-08L22
0.8A
230Vac
1,5A
-
Knob Position
5 Step
Wall
Plastic
IP54
STR-1-15L22
1.5A
230Vac
2A
-
Knob Position
5 Step
Wall
Plastic
IP54
STR-1-22L22 2.2A
230Vac
2.5A
-
Knob Position
5 Step
Wall
Plastic
IP54
STR-1-35L22
3.5A 230Vac
5A
-
Knob Position
5 Step
Wall
Plastic
IP54
STR-1-50L22
5A
230Vac
8A
-
Knob Position
5 Step
Wall
Plastic
IP54
STR-1-75L22 7.5A
230Vac
10A
-
Knob Position
5 Step
Wall
Plastic
IP54
STR-1100L22
10A 230Vac
-
14A
Knob Position
5 Step
Wall
Plastic
IP54
STR-1130L22 13A
230Vac
-
18A
Knob Position
5 Step
Wall
Plastic
IP54
STR-1160L22 16A 230Vac -
25A
Knob Position
5 Step
Wall
Metal
IP54
STR-1200L22
20A
230Vac
-
30A
Knob Position
5 Step
Wall
Metal
IP54
DIMENSIONS
STR..
B
C
Green Power-On
Indicator Lamp
A
1
2
0
3
4
5
D
E
A
B
C
D
E
STR-1-08L22
180
115
85
98
140
Weight(kg)
1.4
STR-1-15L22
180
115
85
98
140
1.7
STR-1-22L22
180
115
85
98
140
2.5
STR-1-35L22
280
200
140
155
193
4.5
STR-1-50L22
280
200
140
155
193
4.9
STR-1-75L22
280
200
140
185
243
6.0
9.5
STR-1100L22
300
300
170
250
250
STR-1130L22
300
300
170
250
250
13
STR-1160L22
430
300
230
125
350
15
STR-1200L22
430
300
230
135
350
18
3
140
4
170
Drilling Data
Mount vertically to allow free
ventilation around the unit
WIRING:
STR..
L N
L1 N
For 3
Wire Motor
230 Vac
Output
230 Vac
Supply
N U
Motor
Knob Position
Voltage Output
1
80
2
110
5
230
All cables & external fuses must be fitted according to local regulations, safety and motor manufacturers requirements.
CAUTION:
These products may be connected to 230VAC supply. The device should be checked by a qualified technician before applying any voltage.
Isolate device from electrical supply before removing cover. Observe all relevant safety precautions, wiring/earthing regulations & electrical ratings.
Observe design limits of temperatures and electrical ratings. Ensure all entry holes are completely sealed for all IP65/weatherproof models.
Always ensure the device operates at the correct electrical rating. If failure of the device can cause damage a safety backup control should be fitted.
All data is for guidance purposes only, subject to change without prior notice and not guaranteed to be absolutely correct unless confirmed by us in writing.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
31
Fan Speed Controls
FAN SPEED CONTROLS 400VAC 3 PHASE 5 SPEED MANUAL OPERATION
STR-4-..
Suitable for 2 or 3 wire motors.
Start current can be 3 x nominal current.
Several motors can be connected at once as long as
the speed controller’s maximum current is not
exceeded. The maximum current is based on a
maximum ambient temperature of 30 C.
The selected Speed Controller’s maximum current must be
just larger than the nominal motor running current.
When the unit is switched on and also when power is
re-applied (with the speed control switch already in the
on position), it will run up to the speed that is set by the
knob position.
These transformer controls vary the
speed of fan motors via a 1-5 step
manual selector knob on the front
which decreases or increases the
supply voltage to the motor. Before
selecting a controller its
compatibility must be ensured.
Please read the Motor Selection
Guide on a separate data sheet.
STR-4-..
Type Nominal
Current
Supply
50-60Hz
Start
Sequence
Manual Speed
Adjustment
Mounting
Case
Enclosure
STR-4-15L40
1.5A
400Vac
Knob Position
5 Step
Wall
Metal
IP54
STR-4-25L40 2.5A
400Vac
Knob Position
5 Step
Wall
Metal
IP54
STR-4-40L40
4A 400Vac
Knob Position
5 Step
Wall
Metal
IP54
STR-4-60L40
6A
400Vac
Knob Position
5 Step
Wall
Metal
IP54
STR-4-80L40 8A
400Vac
Knob Position
5 Step
Wall
Metal
IP54
STR-4-110L40
11A 400Vac
Knob Position
5 Step
Wall
Metal
IP54
DIMENSIONS
STR..
C
A
B
D
A
B
C
D
E
STR-4-15L40
300
300
170
260
260
Weight(kg)
7
STR-4-25L40
300
300
170
260
260
9
STR-4-40L40
300
250
220
210
260
14
STR-4-60L40
400
300
220
260
360
20.5
STR-4-80L40
400
300
220
260
360
27.7
STR-4-110L40
430
400
270
360
360
31.7
E
Drilling Data
Mount vertically to allow free
ventilation around the unit
WIRING:
STR..
R S
T
N
N L1
230 Vac
Output
400 Vac
For auxiliary
equipment if
required.
U V
W
Motor
Knob Position
Voltage Output
1
130
2
180
3
230
4
300
5
400
All cables & external fuses must be fitted according to local regulations, safety and motor manufacturers requirements.
CAUTION:
32
These products may be connected to 400VAC supply. The device should be checked by a qualified technician before applying any voltage.
Isolate device from electrical supply before cover. Observe all relevant safety precautions, wiring/earthing regulations & electrical ratings.
Observe design limits of temperatures and electrical ratings. Ensure all entry holes are completely sealed for all IP65/weatherproof models.
Always ensure the device operates at the correct electrical rating. If failure of the device can cause damage a safety backup control should be fitted.
All data is for guidance purposes only, subject to change without prior notice and not guaranteed to be absolutely correct unless confirmed by us in writing.
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
BMS Temperature Sensors
Section 07
TEMPERATURE SENSORS FOR B.M.S
A range of NTC Thermistor, Ni1000 & PT100/PT1000 sensors for use with most manufacturers BMS equipment.
NTC /Ni
Sensors only suitable for up
to 110°C
EM..
EG..
ED..
EC..
Enclosure Flammability:
ED, EF = UL94-V0
EΙ, EM, ES, EX = UL94-V0
ER, EV, EH = UL94-HB
EK..
EH..
EX..
EF / EJ.. Only suitable for
use with PT100 sensors.
ES..
ALL SENSORS SUPPLIED
WITHOUT LOGO
EI..
EV..
EF.. / EJ..
ER..
Prefix
Type Dimensions Protection Suffix EC- Cable 2m long cable. Sensor 7.1 dia x 40 IP65
ED- Duct 80 dia x 55 160mm probe IP65
EF-
Flue Gas
Probe length 230mm IP65
EH- Black Bulb 85H x 85W x 30D + bulb 16 mm IP30
Trend York MR700,701,702,704,708,710
EI- Immersion <110°C Approx 80 dia x 55 IP65
Alerton Backtalk
EJ- Immersion >110°C Approx 80 dia x 55 IP65
EI-, EJ- ORDER POCKET SEPARATELY
EK- Fan Coil 1m Cable + Duct tube 80mm IP65
EM- Duct Averaging Approx 80 dia x 55
IP65
Compatibility Check Temp/Resistance Chart
3K3A1 Alerton Ibex
20K6A1 Honeywell Excel
10K3A1 Honeywell Aquatrol 2000
Smart
10K3A1/A Satchwell
DRT,DDT,DWT,DOT,DST,DDU 1803,DC1400
10K4A1 Andover
100K6A1 York MR703,705,709
0.5m intervals along 2m cablex8 dia
30K6A1 Drayton DC1100 compensator
ER- Room 85H x 85W x 30D IP30
LST1 Landis & Staefa T1
EV- Room + Adj knob 85H x 85W x 30D Pot 1-11kΩ IP30
LS1000 Siemens, Landis Ni 1000 QAA23, QAD21, QAE21
ES- Strap-On Approx 80 dia x 55
IP65TAC1 TAC
4 sensors at
cable 2m
includes strap for up to 6” pipe dia
PT100 Serck
etc PT100
EX- Outside Approx 80 dia x 55
PT1000 Cylon
etc PT1000
EGS- Thimble sensor Dome dia 15 x 16.5 L Drill hole 12 dia. 200mm cable IP30 - Stainless Brushed Satin
EGB- Thimble sensor Dome dia 15 x 16.5 L Drill hole 12 dia. 200mm cable IP30 - Brass Other colours on request
EGW- Thimble sensor IP65
Dome dia 15 x 16.5 L Drill hole 12 dia. 200mm cable IP30 - White
TO ORDER - SELECT PREFIX + SUFFIX ie Room Sensor for Trend System = ER-10K3A1, Andover Duct sensor = ED-10K4A1
ACCESSORIES:
EE-STK
Stainless Steel Pocket ½” BSP 120mm x 6.2mm id for EI- & EJ
EE-ESS
Fixing strap for ESS Strap-On Thermostats & Sensors
EG-1000
Thermostat Guard Internal Dims 133H x 155W x 70D
EG-2000
Thermostat Guard Internal Dims 102H x 123W x 60D
WIRING:
NTC Thermistor
Ni 1000
EE-STK
6.2 ID
1
2
Terminals 0.5 -2.5mm²
Max length 100mm.
" BSPT
PT100 / PT1000
white
INSTALLATION:
EG-1000 / EG-2000
132
Sensor cable size 7/0.2mm
Screened cable is recommended.
red
EV..
sensor
adjuster 1-11Kohm
Keep away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
The screen should be earthed at the controller end only.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
33
BMS Temperature Sensors
CUSTOM SWITCH PLATES
ESP-...
A variety of special switch plates are available
with different plate and sensor holder materials,
with a choice of NTC sensor and with or without
a potentiometer.
All plates fit a standard single gang BS box.
Plate size 86 x 86mm and approx 2mm thick
Most requirements can be specified using a unique part number. The complete part number can be constructed using the following step by step process:
STEP 1 Choose the plate material.
White plastic
ESP-W-
Stainless
ESP-S-
Brass
ESP-B
Other Finishes
See special items
STEP 2 Specify whether a potentiometer is required.
Stainless
ESP-S-P
Brass
ESP-B-P
STEP 3 Specify the NTC sensor required.
Any of the sensors on the Temperature Sensors for BMS page of this catalogue can be specified. For example 10K3A1, LS1000 etc.
STEP 4 Specify whether a button sensor holder is required
Thimble (standard)
ESP-S-10K3A1
Button
ESP-S-10K3A1/b
STEP 5 Specify any special items
Examples of this are:
Special engraving
Off switch on the potentiometer at the low value end
Special finishes-Note a sample must be provided for matching purposes.
34
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
BMS Temperature Sensors
Section 07
B.M.S TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE CHART
VALUES LISTED ARE FOR GUIDANCE PURPOSES ONLY - SEE MANUFACTURERS DATA FOR FURTHER INFORMATION IF REQUIRED.
3K3A1
10K3A1
10K3A1/A
10K4A1
20K6A1
30K6A1
100K6A1
PT100
PT1000
TAC1
LST1
LS1000
SN1000
°C
Res
Ω
Res
Ω
Res
Ω
Res
Ω
Res
Ω
Res
Ω
Res
Ω
Res
Ω
Res
Ω
Res
Ω
Res
Ω
Res
Ω
Res
Ω
-30
53005
176683
9465
135233
415479
622944
2077394
88.22
882
23800
1934
871.6
842
-20
29092
96974
9067
78930
221297
331876
1106485
92.16
922
13700
2030
913.5
893
-15
21868
72895
8796
61030
163875
245785
819378
94.12
941
10500
2078
934.7
919
-10
16589
55298
8472
47549
122473
183697
612366
96.09
961
8220
2127
956.2
946
-5
12694
42314
8093
37316
92336
138502
461683
98.04
980
6450
2176
977.9
973
0
9795
32650
7661
29490
70203
105305
351017
100
1000
5120
2226
1000.0
1000
1
9309
31030
7569
28157
66524
99787
332619
100.39
1004
2236
1004.4
1006
2
8850
29500
7475
26891
63058
94588
315258
100.78
1008
2246
1008.8
1011
3
8416
28054
7379
25689
59792
89689
298959
101.17
1012
2256
1013.3
1017
4
8006
26688
7281
24547
56713
85069
283558
101.56
1015
2266
1017.8
1022
5
7619
25396
7182
23462
53809
80713
269041
101.95
1019
2276
1022.2
1028
6
7252
24173
7082
22430
51068
76604
255337
102.34
1024
2286
1026.7
1033
7
6905
23016
6980
21450
48483
72726
242414
102.73
1027
2296
1031.2
1039
8
6577
21921
6877
20517
46043
69064
230210
103.12
1031
2306
1035.7
1044
9
6266
20885
6772
19631
43739
65608
218688
103.51
1035
2316
1040.2
1050
10
5971
19904
6667
18787
41562
62347
207807
103.90
1039
2326
1044.7
1056
11
5692
18974
6560
17983
39505
59257
197521
104.29
1043
2337
1049.3
1061
12
5428
18092
6453
17219
37561
56346
187803
104.68
1047
2347
1053.8
1067
13
5177
17257
6345
16490
35723
53585
178613
105.07
1051
2357
1058.4
1072
14
4940
16465
6236
15797
33985
50978
169924
105.46
1055
2367
1063.0
1078
15
4714
15714
6126
15136
32341
48511
161702
105.85
1058
2670
2377
1067.6
1084
16
4500
15001
6016
14507
30785
46178
153923
106.24
1062
2560
2388
1072.1
1090
17
4297
14325
5906
13906
29312
43969
146560
106.63
1066
2460
2398
1076.7
1095
18
4105
13623
5795
13334
27918
41877
139588
107.02
1070
2360
2408
1081.3
1101
19
3916
13053
5681
12788
26597
39895
132984
107.40
1074
2270
2418
1086.0
1107
20
3748
12494
5573
12268
25346
38019
126729
107.79
1078
2180
2429
1090.6
1112
21
3583
11943
5369
11771
24160
36240
120799
108.18
1082
2100
2439
1095.3
1118
22
3426
11420
5353
11297
23035
34554
115179
108.57
1086
2020
2449
1099.9
1124
23
3277
10923
5243
10845
21970
32955
109850
108.96
1090
1940
2460
1104.6
1130
24
3135
10450
5134
10413
20959
31438
104796
109.35
1094
1870
2470
1109.3
1136
25
3000
10000
5025
10000
20000
30000
100000
109.73
1098
1800
2480
1113.9
1141
26
2871
9572
4917
9606
19089
28635
95449
110.12
1101
2491
1119.6
1147
27
2749
9165
4809
9229
18225
27339
91128
110.51
1105
2501
1123.4
1153
28
2633
8777
4703
8869
17405
26108
87026
110.90
1110
2512
1128.1
1159
29
2522
8408
4597
8525
16625
24939
83129
111.28
1113
2522
1132.8
1165
30
2417
8056
4492
8197
15885
23828
79428
111.67
1117
2532
1137.6
1171
35
1959
6530
3987
6754
12697
19046
63489
113.61
1136
2585
1161.5
1200
40
1598
5325
3518
5594
10211
15317
51058
115.54
1155
2638
1185.7
1230
45
1310
4367
3089
4656
8259
12390
41301
117.47
1175
2692
1210.2
1260
50
1080
3601
2702
3893
6719
10079
33598
119.40
1194
2745
1234.9
1291
55
895.5
2985
2358
3271
5495
8243
27479
121.32
1213
2800
1260.0
1322
60
746.2
2487
2056
2760
4518
6777
22593
123.24
1232
2855
1285.4
1353
65
624.7
2082
1792
2339
3733
5600
18669
125.16
1251
2910
1311.1
1385
70
525.5
1751
1563
1990
3100
4650
15502
127.07
1271
400
2966
1337.1
1417
80
376.9
1256
1193
1458
2167
3251
10837
130.89
1309
300
3079
1390.1
1483
90
274.8
916.0
921
1084
1542
2313
7710
134.70
1347
230
3194
1444.4
1549
100
203.6
678.6
722
817.2
1115
1672
5574
138.50
1385
180
3311
1500.0
1618
110
153.0
510.1
575
624.1
818.9
1228
4092
142.29
1423
3430
1556.9
1688
120
116.6
388.6
466
482.5
609.9
914
3047
146.06
1461
3552
1615.3
1760
130
89.95
300.0
386
377.2
460.4
690
2299
149.82
1498
3675
1675.1
1833
140
70.23
234.1
324
298.1
351.8
527
1756
153.58
1536
3801
1736.4
1909
150
55.44
184.8
278
238.0
272.0
407
1357
157.31
1573
3929
1799.2
1987
160
161.04
1610
170
164.76
1648
180
168.46
1685
190
172.16
1722
200
175.84
1758
250
194.07
1941
300
212.02
2120
350
229.67
2297
400
247.04
2470
Temp
4090
3290
1490
1040
740
540
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
35
BMS Temperature Sensors
TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS 4-20mA / 0-10VDC
E..
Consumption < 32mA & Load < 600Ω
for 4-20mA devices
A range of temperature
transmitters fitted with PT100
sensing elements giving a 4-20mA
or 0-10VDC output signal linear
across the temperature range.
ED..
Consumption < 25mA & Load <10KΩ
for 0-10VDC devices
EI..
Accuracy <1.5% of range
EH..
EF.. / EJ..
Ambient -20/+70 C
Temp Effect ± 2μA/ C
*CK1000 fitted with ÎKÌ type thermocouple
ER..
Enclosure Flammability:
ED, EF, EI, EM, ES, EX = UL94-V0
EH, ER = UL94-HB
EX..
ES..
EM..
4-20mA Type Description
- 0-10VDC
Range °C
Dimensions
Protection
-10 / +40 -10 / +110 Approx 80 dia x 55 160mm probe
Approx 80 dia x 55 160mm probe IP65
IP65
ED-C040 ED-C110 ED-V040
ED-V110
Duct Duct EF-C400 EF-CK1000 EF-V400
-
Flue Gas Flue Gas 0 / 400 0 / 1000 Probe length 230mm
Probe length 230mm *
IP65
IP65
EH-C040 EH-V040
Black Bulb -10 / +40 85H x 85W x 30D + bulb 16mm
IP30
Approx 80 dia x 55
Approx 80 dia x 55
Approx 80 dia x 55
IP65
IP65
IP65
EI-C040 EI-V040
EI-C110 EI-V110
EJ-C160 EJ-V160
Immersion -10 / +40 Immersion -10 / +110 Immersion -10 / +160
EI- EJ- Order Pocket Separately
EM-C040 EM-V040
Duct Averaging -10 / +40 Approx 80 dia x 55 2m capillary
IP65
ER-C040 ER-V040
Room -10 / +40 85H x 85W x 30D
IP30
ES-C040 ES-C110 EX-C040 ES-V040
ES-V110
Strap-On Strap-On -10 / +40 -10 / +110 Approx 80 dia x 55 strap up to 6" pipe
Approx 80 dia x 55 strap up to 6" pipe
IP65
IP65
EX-V040
Outside -10 / +40
Approx 80 dia x 55
IP65
4-20mA devices Supply = 24VDC loop ± 25%
0-10vdc devices Supply = 24VAC/DC ± 15%
ACCESSORIES:
EE-2B / EE-STK
132
EE-2B Brass pocket for EI..
up to 110°C
EE-STK Stainless steel pocket for EI.. EJ..
EE-ESS Larger dia. fixing strap for strap-on stats / sensors. Per metre
6.2 ID
1
EG-1000 Stat Guard Internal dims 133H X 155W X 70D
EG-2000 Stat Guard Internal dims 102H X 123W X 60D
WIRING:
4-20mA devices:
+
36
EE-ESS
0-10VDC devices:
0V
24VDC
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm Max length 300m. " BSPT
EG-1000 / EG-2000
4-20mA
INSTALLATION:
2
+
24vac/dc
0-10vdc
Min sensor cable size 7/0.2mm Screened cable is recommended. Keep away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
The screen should be earthed at the controller end only
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
Input-Output Modules
Section 08
B.M.S INPUT - OUTPUT MODULES SINGLE AND ADJUSTABLE RELAY
ESRM..
Volt free contacts
Din rail mounting
DIN RAIL mounted relay modules compatible
with building management systems, providing
a switched output when an input signal is
applied.
The 12VDC relay is suitable for use with
TREND controllers ONLY which give a
0-10vdc output. For other 0-10vdc systems
use model ESRM-10.
Max Ambient -20 /+50 C
Auto eject relay clip
Flammability = UL94-V0
ESRM-10 only:
Off-On-Auto link to aid commissioning.
LED light on when relay energised.
ESRM-12 / 24 / 230..
Type Switch Point Coil Input Approx. Voltage Resistance Input current > 0.5mA
ESRM-10
Coil Current Approx mA Switch Rating 230VAC SPDT
Compatibility Enclosure
TREND I-Q 0 10vdc ONLY IP00
ESRM-12DC 8 VDC 12 VDC 576Ω 20 (3)A ESRM-24DC 17 VDC 24 VDC 1440Ω 18 12(3)A 24vdc B.M.S. controllers IP00
ESRM-24AC 17 VAC 24 VAC 350Ω 32 12(3)A TREND IQ IP00
ESRM-230AC 172 VAC 230 VAC 32500Ω 3.3 12(3)A Most B.M.S. controllers IP00
Type Input ESRM-10 Supply ± 15% 0-10VDC adj. 24VAC/DC Switch Rating 230VAC SPDT Feedback Output
Consumption Enclosure
10(3)A 0-10VDC 51mA IP00
DIMENSIONS
ESRM-12 / 24/ 230..
56
ESRM-10
50
15.5
45
82
73.5
WIRING:
ESRM-12 / 24/ 230..
C
OUTPUT
11
12
14
NC
NO
INPUT
+ 0V
24VAC/DC
IN 0V
0-10VDC
5
0
Terminal Size:
0.5 - 2.5mm rising clamps
Polarity is not important
A2
NC NO C
INSTALLATION:
1
RELAY
OUTPUT
On
Off
Auto
HIGH
10
5
LED
A1
INPUT
VOLTAGE
ESRM-10
INPUT
LOW
9
When the 0-10vdc input signal
increases to the High setting
contacts C-NO close.
When the 0-10vdc input signal
decreases to the Low setting
contacts C-NO open.
0-10VDC
0V
OUTPUT
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm rising clamps
Min sensor / control signal cable size 7/0.2mm Max length 100m.
Screened cable is recommended The screen should be earthed at the controller end only
Keep sensor/control signal wires away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
37
Input-Output Modules
B.M.S RELAY OVERRIDE MODULE 1 - 4 x 0-10VDC INPUTS 4 RELAY OUTPUTS
EROV4
HAND-OFF-AUTO Manual Override
links on each relay: HAND = Energised
OFF = De-energised
AUTO = Controller operated
Volt free contacts
LED indication
Din-Rail mounting
Input current > 1 mA
Max Ambient -10 /+50°C
Flammability = UL94-V0
This unit provides up to 4 independent
switched relay outputs from either 1,2,3 or 4
independent 0-10vdc inputs. Alternatively up
to 4 outputs can be switched from just 1 x
0-10vdc input via link selection. All switch
points are fixed at approx 5vdc on and 4vdc
off. This product can also be used in place of
4 single relays.
EROV4
Type
24VAC/DC
1-4 x 0-10VDC
4 x 10(3)A > 5vdc DIMENSIONS:
Consumption
Mounting
Enclosure
60mA Din Rail IP00
< 4vdc AX-ORM4C Connection
50
80
ALL ON
24V 0V 0V IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1
O H A - IN1
O H A - IN1
NORMAL
O H A - IN1
NC NO C
OH A
NC NO C
NC NO C
Relay 1
Relay 3
Relay 4
82
Relay 2
EROV4
Switch Rating
Relays
230VAC SPDT On Off
Power ON
Supply
Input Signal
+-15%
NC NO C
WIRING:
Up to 4 x 0-10vdc inputs
24V 0V 0V IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1
All On
O H A IN1
O H A IN1
Normal
O H A IN1
OHA
LED's
ON
RL4
RL3
NC NO C NC NO C
RL2
RL1
NC NO C NC NO C
Each 0-10vdc input and relay output is independent. Outputs 1,2,3 or 4 can be linked to just one input IN1.
C-NO makes at approx >5vdc for each relay and C-NC makes at approx <4vdc for each relay. ie 0-4vdc OFF 5-10vdc ON.
O – Link to switch relay permanently off.
H – Link to switch relay permanently on.
A – Link to switch relay via the input signal. IN1 –
ALL ON – Link to switch all output relays permanently on.
NORMAL – Link to switch the relays via 0-10vdc input.
Outputs 1,2,3 or 4 can be linked to switch from 1 x 0-10v input.
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm² rising clamps
Min sensor / control signal cable size 7/0.2mm
Screened cable is recommended
The screen should be earthed at controller end only
Keep sensor/control signal wires away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
38
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
Max length 100m
Input-Output Modules
Section 08
B.M.S INPUT OUTPUT MODULES 2 STAGE RELAY, RAISE - LOWER, HIGH LOW 0-10VDC
E2RM..
Select HIGH-LOW or
RAISE-LOWER functions via link.
These products accept a 0-10vdc input and
produce a 2 stage relay output which can be
used for external plant switching. HIGH-LOW or
RAISE-LOWER functions can be selected. For
multi-stage heating & cooling, two of these units
or other relay modules can be used with an
ETC.. E13.. temperature controller or similar.
ON-OFF-AUTO link provided on each
relay to aid commissioning.
LED's indicate relay status.
Volt free contacts
Din-Rail mounting
Input current > 0.5 mA
Flammability = UL94-V0
Max Ambient -10 /+50°C
E2RM..
Type
E2RM
Supply
Input Signal
+-15%
24VAC/DC
0-10vdc
Power
Consumption
Switch Rating
230VAC SPDT
Compatibility
Enclosure
40mA 2 x 10(3)A Most B.M.S. Controllers
IP00
DIMENSIONS:
WIRING
50
Timer Adjustment Potentiometer
45
0-10V 0V 24V
Test Jumper
Function Link
BIN R/L H/L
AHO
AHO
82
Low/Lower
Relay
High/Raise
Relay
NC NO C NC NO C
INSTALLATION:
HIGH-LOW Mode - Relays switch in sequence.
RAISE-LOWER Mode - Relays switch as shown in the table below.
High/Low
LOW
HIGH
Raise/Lower
LOWER
RAISE
0v
OFF
OFF
0v
OFF
OFF
5v
ON
OFF
5v
ON
OFF
10v
ON
ON
7v
OFF
OFF
10v
OFF
ON
All values are maximum switching points. Exact switching points may be slightly lower than those stated
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm² rising clamps Min sensor / control signal cable size 7/0.2mm Screened cable is recommended The screen should be earthed at controller end only
Keep sensor/control signal wires away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
Max length 100m
39
Input-Output Modules
B.M.S INPUT - OUTPUT MODULES 3 STAGE RELAY, SEQUENCE, BINARY 0-10VDC
E3RMT..
ON-OFF-AUTO Manual Override
links on each relay: ON = Energised
OFF = De-energised
AUTO = Controller operated
Volt free contacts LED's indicate relay status
Din-Rail mounting
Consumption 80mA
Input current > 1 mA
Max Ambient -10 /+50°C
Flammability = UL94-V0
These products accept a 0-10vdc input
and produce a 3 stage relay output which
can be used for external plant switching.
4 modes of operation can be selected:
3 stage switching, Heat - Cool + Fan,
Sequence or 2 Stage Binary.
For multi-stage heating & cooling, 2 of
these units or other relay modules can be
used with the E13.. temperature controllers
or similar.
E3RMT
Type
Supply
Input Signal
+-15%
Switch Rating
230VAC SPDT
E3RMT
24VAC/DC
0-10VDC
3 x 10(3)A
Operation Selectable
Time Delay
Enclosure
3 Stage relay or Fan + Cool/Heat
Sequence or 2 Stage Binary
0-60s
IP00
DIMENSIONS:
50
80
82
WIRING:
Time Delay : Allows a time period before each stage switches on or off.
Set to 0 if not required.
REV 0V IN 0V 24V
Mode 1
Mode 2
Step
Settle Time
AHO
AHO
AHO
R1
R2
R3
RS : Remove jumper before changing position of JP1 or JP2.
Alternatively disconnect the power supply.
Replace jumper RS after changing JP1 or JP2
A B C
ON OFF
0.1 1
AHO : A = Auto
H = Relay On
JP1/ JP2 : Mode settings
O = Relay Off
30
TimeDelay
0
MODE
60
NC NO C
INSTALLATION:
NC NO C
3 STAGE RELAY MODE
NC NO C
FAN - HEAT - COOL MODE
1-3 switch on as input increases
MODE 1
MODE 2
3 stage
C
C
Fan + heat/cool
B
A
Sequence
C
B
2 stage Binary
B
B
SEQUENCE MODE
BINARY MODE
Only 1 stage on at any time
LOW
MID
HIGH
FAN
COOL
HEAT
RL1
RL1
RL2
OUT 1
OUT 2
0v
OFF
OFF
OFF
0v
OFF
OFF
OFF
0v
OFF
OFF
OFF
0v
OFF
OFF
4v
ON
OFF
OFF
4v
ON
ON
OFF
4v
ON
OFF
OFF
4v
ON
OFF
7v
ON
ON
OFF
7v
0N
OFF
OFF
7v
OFF
ON
OFF
7v
OFF
ON
10v
ON
ON
ON
10v
ON
OFF
ON
10v
OFF
OFF
ON
10v
ON
ON
All values are maximum switching points. Exact switching points may be slightly lower than those stated
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm² rising clamps Min sensor / control signal cable size 7/0.2mm Screened cable is recommended The screen should be earthed at controller end only
Keep sensor/control signal wires away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
40
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
Max length 100m
Input-Output Modules
Section 08
B.M.S INPUT - OUPUT MODULES 4 STAGE RELAY, SEQUENCE, BINARY 0-10VDC
E4RM
ON-OFF-AUTO Manual Override
links on each relay: ON = Energised
OFF = De-energised
AUTO = Controller operated
LED's indicate relay status
Volt free contacts Input current > 1mA
Din-Rail mounting Consumption 100mA
Max Ambient -10 /+50°C
Flammability = UL94-V0
These products accept a 0-10vdc input
and produce a 4 stage relay output which
can be used for external plant switching.
Suitable for staging (which can be reversed)
or sequencing operation.
For multi-stage heating & cooling, two of these
units or other relay modules can be used with
the E13.. temperature controllers or similar.
E4RM
Type
Supply
Input Signal
Enclosure
E4RM
24VAC/DC
Switch Rating
Time Delay
+-15%
0-10VDC
4 x 10(3)A
Compatibility
230VAC SPDT
0-200s
Most BMS Controllers
IP00
UP TO 10 STAGED SWITCHING ACROSS 0-10VDC CAN BE ACHIEVED WHEN THIS PRODUCT IS USED WITH THE E6RM
DIMENSIONS:
WIRING:
96
50
0-10V on
2-10V off
82
Mode 1
Mode 2
Step
Settle Time
REV 0V IN 0V 24V
AHO
AHO
AHO
AHO
R1
R2
R3
R4
NC NO C
NC NO C
NC NO C
NC NO C
A B C
ON OFF
0.1 1
MODE RESET LINK : Remove link before changing
modes and re-fit the link to reset the operation.
30
TIME DELAY : Allows a time period between each stage
switching on or off.
INSTALLATION:
60
Time Delay 0
STAGED MODE mode1 = C mode2 = C
Relays 1-4 switch on as the input signal increases
STAGED MODE mode1 = A mode 2 = B
Relays 4-1 switch on as the input signal increases when
terminals R-R are closed via a volt free contact.
INPUT
RLY 1
RLY 2
RLY 3
RLY 4
INPUT
RLY 1
RLY 2
RLY 3
RLY 4
0v
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
0v
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
2.4V
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
2.4V
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
4.8V
ON
ON
ON
OFF
4.8V
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
7.2V
ON
ON
ON
OFF
7.2V
OFF
ON
ON
ON
9.6V
ON
ON
ON
ON
9.6V
ON
ON
ON
ON
SEQUENCED MODE mode1 = C Only one relay is on at any time
mode2 = C
STAGED MODE + E6RM = 10 STG. JP1 = B JP2 = A
Connect 0-10VDC to both E6RM and E4RM.
No time delay or reverse action.
INPUT
RLY 1
RLY 2
RLY 3
RLY 4
INPUT
RLY 1
RLY 2
RLY 3
RLY 4
0v
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
6V
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
2.4V
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
7V
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
4.8V
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
8V
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
7.2V
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
9V
ON
ON
ON
OFF
9.6V
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
10V
ON
ON
ON
ON
BINARY MODE JP1 = B JP2 = B
INPUT
0.6
1.2
1.8
2.4
3.0
3.6
4.2
4.8
5.4
6.0
6.6
7.2
7.8
8.4
9.4
9.6
RLY 1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
RLY 2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
RLY 3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
RLY 4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
All values are maximum switching points. Exact switching points may be slightly lower than those stated
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm² rising clamps Min sensor / control signal cable size 7/0.2mm Screened cable is recommended The screen should be earthed at controller end only
Keep sensor/control signal wires away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
Max length 100m
41
Input-Output Modules
B.M.S INPUT - OUTPUT MODULES 6 (10) STAGE RELAY, SEQUENCE 0-10VDC
E6RM
ON-OFF-AUTO Manual Override
links on each relay: ON = Energised
OFF = De-energised
AUTO = Controller operated
Volt free contacts LED's indicate relay status
Din-Rail mounting Consumption 166mA
Input current > 1mA
Max Ambient -10 /+50°C
Flammability = UL94-V0
These products accept a 0-10vdc input
and produce a 6 stage relay output which
can be used for external plant switching.
Suitable for staging (which can be reversed)
or sequencing operation.
For multi-stage heating & cooling, two of
these units or other relay modules can be
used with the E13.. temperature controllers
or similar.
E6RM
Type
Supply
Input Signal
+-15%
E6RM
24VAC/DC
0-10VDC
Switch Rating
230VAC SPDT
Time Delay
Compatibility
Enclosure
6 x 10(3)A
0-200s
Most BMS Controllers
IP00
UP TO 10 STAGED SWITCHING ACROSS 0-10VDC CAN BE ACHIEVED WHEN THIS PRODUCT IS USED WITH THE E4RM
DIMENSIONS:
WIRING:
140
50
REV 0V IN 0V 24V
2-10V 0-10V
AHO
AHO
AHO
AHO
AHO
AHO
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
NC NO C
NC NO C
82
Mode 1
Mode 2
Step
Settle Time
A B C
ON OFF
0.1 1
30
MODE RESET LINK : Remove link before changing
modes and re-fit the link to reset the operation.
Time Delay
0
60
TIME DELAY : Allows a time period between each stage
switching on or off.
INSTALLATION:
STAGED MODE mode1 = C mode2 = C
Relays 1-6 switch on as the input signal increases.
NC NO C
NC NO C
NC NO C
STAGED MODE - REVERSE D mode1 = A mode2 = B
Relays 6-1 switch on as the input signal increases when
terminals R-R are closed via a volt free contact.
INPUT
RLY 1
RLY 2
RLY 3
RLY 4
RLY 5
RLY 6
INPUT
RLY 1
RLY 2
RLY 3
RLY 4
RLY 5
RLY 6
0v
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
0v
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
2v
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
2v
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
3v
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
3v
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
4.5v
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
4.5v
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
6v
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
6v
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
7.8v
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
7.8v
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
10v
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
10v
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SEQUENCED MODE mode1 = C
Only one relay is on at any time.
mode2 = B
STAGED MODE + E4RM = 10 STAGES JP1=B JP2=A
Connect 0-10VDC to both E6RM and E4RM. No time
delay or reverse action.
INPUT
RLY 1
RLY 2
RLY 3
RLY 4
RLY 5
RLY 6
INPUT
RLY 1
RLY 2
RLY 3
RLY 4
RLY 5
0v
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
0v
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
2v
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
1v
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
RLY 6
3v
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
2v
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
4.5v
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
3v
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
6v
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
4v
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
7.8v
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
5v
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
10v
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
10v
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
All values are maximum switching points. Exact switching points may be slightly lower than those stated
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm² rising clamps Min sensor / control signal cable size 7/0.2mm Screened cable is recommended The screen should be earthed at controller end only
Keep sensor/control signal wires away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
42
NC NO C
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
Max length 100m
Input-Output Modules
Section 08
B.M.S INPUT - OUTPUT MODULES 0-10VDC TO 0-20V PHASE CUT
E..PCM
Input current < 1mA
Use the correct size transformer for the VA
rating of the actuator / valve.
These units convert one or two
0-10vdc inputs to one or two
0-20V phase-cut outputs to control
Staefa 2 wire valves and Belimo
actuators.
The output signal varies at teh same rate
as the input signal.
Humidity 0-90%HR non condensing
Ambient -10/+50°C
Consumption 51mA
Type Power Supply
Input Signal
Output Signal
±15%
EDPCM Flammability = UL94-V0
MaxActuator
Rating
Mounting
Enclosure
24VAC
2 x 0-10VDC
2 x 20V
30VA/channel
Din Rail
IP00
24VAC
1 x 0-10VDC
1 x 20V
60VA
Din Rail
IP00
24VAC
1 x 0-10VDC
1 x 20V
120VA
Din Rail
IP00
ESPCM
EHPCM DIMENSIONS
IN2 IN1 0V
24VAC 0V
E H S D PCM
30 60 120 VA
77
114
48
77
114
48
77
114
62
ELECTRO CONTROLS LTD (GB)
-
2
+
-
1
+
PHASE
CUT
OUTPUT
0 - 20V
EDPCM
ESPCM
EHPCM
WIRING:
EDPCM
ESPCM
EHPCM
0-10V
Input
IN1 0V
24VAC/DC
Power Supply
24VAC
Power Supply
~
IN2 IN1 0V
~
24VAC 0V
E H S D PCM
30 60 120 VA
24VAC 0V
0V
24V
ELECTRO CONTROLS LTD (GB)
-
2
+
-
1
+
PHASE
CUT
OUTPUT
0 - 20V
For the 24VAC POWER SUPPLY select transformer VA rating according to actuator rating.
NOTE:
The ESPCM & EHPCM can only be used for 1 x 0-10VDC input & 1 x 0-20V phase cut output using channel 1.
The EDPCM can be used for 2 x 0-10VDC input & 2 x 0-20V phase cut output using channels 1&2.
If the 0-10VDC input signal is removed, that channel will be cut off.
THE OUTPUTS MUST NOT BE CONNECTED OR DISCONNECTED WHEN THE UNIT IS POWERED AS THIS WILL DAMAGE THE UNIT.
INSTALLATION:
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm rising clamps
Min sensor / control signal cable size 7/0.2mm Max length 100m.
Screened cable is recommended The screen should be earthed at the controller end only
Keep sensor/control signal wires away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
43
Input-Output Modules
B.M.S INPUT - OUTPUT MODULES 4 & 6 DIGITAL INPUT MULTIPLEXER
E4DIM, E6DIM
LED status indication
Input signal test links
These units allow up to 4 or 6 volt free inputs
to be converted into a single 0-10vdc
analogue output channel which can in turn be
decoded by a B.M.S controller into digital
status bits.
Load > 4.7kΩ
Din-Rail mounting
Compatible with TREND A to D
Function module in the IQ controller.
Max Ambient -10 /+50°C
Flammability = UL94-V0
Type Power Supply
±15%
Consumption
Max.
Inputs
24VAC/DC 230VAC
Output Selectable
E4DIM 24VAC/DC 50mA 4 x Volt Free Contacts 24VAC/DC 60mA 6 x Volt Free Contacts Mounting
Enclosure
0-9vdc or 0.4-9.4vdc
Din Rail
IP00
0-10vdc
Din Rail
IP00
E6DIM DIMENSIONS
E6DIM
E4DIM
42
42
45
82
WIRING:
94
82
E4DIM
E6DIM
Jumpers
0-10vdc
OUTPUT LINK:
Select V for vdc output
Mode:
Normal or Reverse Action :
N = Normal
0.44 0
OFFSET LINK:
Select 0-9vdc
or 0.4-9.4vdc output
adjustable via pot.
R = Reverse
0V 24V
OFFSET
O/p 0V
V
0V 24V
I
Offset:
Voltage versions
OUTPUT
Off = 0-10V
POT
MODE LINK:
Select N for normal output
On = 2-10V
N R
N R
MODE
MODE
LED
OFFSET
Off On
Current versions
VR1
Off = 0-20mA
LED's
On = 4-20mA
Links - remove link on
any inputs being used
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
IN 4
AHO AHO AHO AHO AHO AHO
VF IN1 VF IN2 VF IN3 VF IN4 VF IN5 VF IN6
A
B
C
D
VOLT FREE INPUTS
All inputs must be volt free. Screened cable is recommended to eliminate electrical interference.
INSTALLATION:
The unit is pre-calibrated, therefore the potentiometer should not require field adjustment of the 0-10vdc signal.
Total output voltage is equal to the sum of the inputs that are switched ON :E4DIM 0-9vdc Output:
Input A = 4.8V B = 2.4V
C = 1.2V
D = 0.6V
If A + C are ON then output = 6V if B + C are ON then output = 3.6V
E4DIM 0.4-9.4vdc Output:
Input A = 5.2V B = 2.8V
C = 1.6V
D = 1.0V
If A + C are ON then output = 6.8V if B + C are ON then output = 4.4V
E6DIM: Input IN1 = 0.156V
IN2 = 0.313V
IN3 = 0.625V
IN4 = 1.25V
IN5 = 2.5V IN6 = 5V
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm² rising clamps
Min sensor / control signal cable size 7/0.2mm
Max length 100m
Screened cable is recommended
The screen should be earthed at controller end only
Keep sensor/control signal wires away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
44
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
Input-Output Modules
Section 08
B.M.S INPUT-OUTPUT MODULES 0-10VDC IN 0-135Ω / 0-1000Ω OUT
DRN3.1..
Electrically Isolated Resistive Output
These products accept a 0-10VDC input
and convert it into a proportional 0-135Ω
or 0-1000Ω resistance output.
Power and signal Status Indicator
Input Impedance: 0-10VDC 10KΩ
4-20mA 250Ω
For use in electrical actuator control,
electronic potentiometer, resistive sensor
simulation.
DRN3.1..
Type Supply
Input
Output
±10%
DRN3.1.1 Output
Resolution
Consumption
Protection
24VAC/DC
2 x 0-10VDC
0-135Ω
256 steps
250mA
IP00
24VAC/DC
0-10VDC
0-1000Ω
256 steps
250mA
IP00
DRN3.1.2
WIRING:
DRN3.1..
121
Wiper (R)
Max (W)
LABEL
Min (B)
B
W
R
RESISTANCE
OUTPUT
S6
S5
POWER
S4
83
S3
S2
S1
PWR COM IN
+V
0V +
+24VAC/DC
Input 0-10VDC
Common
The jumper settings for S1- S6 are as shown above.
The resistance between terminals B and R will increase as the input
signal increases and the resistance between W and R will decrease.
INSTALLATION:
Terminals 0.5 - 2.5mm² Max length 100m. Sensor cable size 7/0.2mm Screened cable is recommended. Keep away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
The screen should be earthed at the controller 0V terminal only.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
45
Input-Output Modules
B.M.S INPUT-OUTPUT MODULE RAISE / LOWER IN 0-10VDC OUT
AUD
255 Step Resolution
Pulsed relay contact input
This product converts a Floating Point Input to
a 0-10VDC Output.
Accuracy +/-3%
LED Status Indicators
There are two inputs on the AUD, one to
increase the output and one to decrease the
output. The output is stable when both inputs
are off.
Field selectable rate of change
Field Adjustable Output with manual
Override Potentiometer
AUD
Type Supply
±10%
Output
Rate of Change*
Signal Trigger Level
Consumption
Protection
AUD
24VAC/DC
0-10VDC
45sec - 240sec
24 to 26.4VAC
50mA
IP00
*The time it takes for the output to go from 0-10VDC
95
WIRING:
INSTALLATION:
Terminals 0.5 - 2.5mm
Sensor cable size 7/0.2mm
Keep away from power cables/units
which may cause interference.
Max length 100m.
Screened cable is recommended.
The screen should be earthed at the
controller 0V terminal only.
TRC
OFF
TRIAC Jumper
Position
SPAN
NRM
+ PWR -
U
D
Pulsed relay contacts (optically isolated)
+ PWR - + UP - + DWN - 24V SIG
+ UP -
OFFSET
Pulsed relay contacts (not isolated)
+ PWR - + UP - + DWN - 24V SIG
0-10VDC
Set DIP Switch
for Output
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Voltage
Set DIP Switch for
Offset of Output
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Offset of
1volt
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Adjustable Offset of
(-)
0 - 5V
Separate
power supply
24 VAC/DC
OFF
Controller / Triac Output (not isolated)
+ PWR - + UP - + DWN - 24V SIG
Set DIP Switch for Full
Scale Output Ramping Time
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 45
seconds
OFF
seconds
24
VAC
Controller
"UP" Output
46
OFF
PULSE
UP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 120
seconds
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 240
Set DIP Switch for Maximum
Signal Span Output
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 volt
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 volt
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 volt
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 13 volt
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 adjustable
1 - 11 volt
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 adjustable
10 - 20 volt
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 adjustable
4 - 14 volt
OFF
seconds
OFF
Controller
"DOWN" Output
Controller
"UP" Output
Controller
"DOWN" Output
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
DOWN
OFF
OFF
24V
AC/DC
Power
Supply
57
+
MAN OUT
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 60
24
VAC
MAN|AUTO
POWER
OFF
Controller / Triac Output (isolated)
+ PWR - + UP - + DWN - 24V SIG
J2
+ DWN - 24V SIG
Output
(+)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TRC|NRM
J1
0-10VDC
MANUAL
SW1
OFF
Black Area
Indicates
Switch
Direction
Input-Output Modules
Section 08
B.M.S RESISTANCE INPUT MODULE 135/1000Ω IN 0-10VDC OUT
ERIM
Multi-turn pot to adjust output.
LED indication
Max ambient -10 /+50°C
Din-Rail mounting
Flammability = UL94-V0
These units convert 0-135 ohm or
0-1000 ohm input to a 0-10vdc output.
ERIM
Type Supply
±10%
Input
Output
Adjustable
Consumption
Mounting
Protection
ERIM 135R 24VAC/DC
0-135Ω
0-10VDC
20mA
Din Rail
IP00
ERIM 1K
24VAC/DC
0-1000Ω
0-10VDC
20mA
Din Rail
IP00
DIMENSIONS
ERIM 135R/1K
42
45
82
WIRING:
ERIM 135R/1K
0-10vdc
0V
0V 24V
R
IN
LED
POT
INSTALLATION:
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm rising clamps
Min sensor / control signal cable size 7/0.2mm
Screened cable is recommended The screen should be earthed at the controller end only
Keep sensor/control signal wires away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
47
Input-Output Modules
TRANSMITTER SETPOINT CONTROLLER 0-10VDC / 4-20mA IN 0-10VDC OUT
E10-10
Input current > 0.5mA
Max Ambient -10/+50°C
This product can be used with pressure,
temperature, humidity, flow or level
transmitters. By connecting the transmitter
output into this controller a setpoint can be
adjusted and a 0-10VDC output will be produced
over the desired proportional band.
Flammability = UL94-V0
E10-10
Type Setpoint Range E10-10 0-100% Proportional Input Output Band 0-50% 0-10VDC or 4-20mA DIMENSIONS
0-10VDC Supply ±15%
Consumption Mounting Enclosure
24VAC/DC 32mA Din Rail IP00
E10-10
45
66
82
EXAMPLES:
E10-10 used with a pressure transmitter ie range 0-16 bar & 0-10vdc output.
A setpoint of 50% represents 8 bar.
A prop band of 10% represents 1.6 bar (10% of the range) J4 & J5 link on 0-10.
Therefore the output will be 0-10vdc linear over the range from 8 bar 0vdc to 9.6 bar 10vdc.
If J4 & J5 link is on 10-0 then the output will be 0-10vdc linear over the range from 8 bar 0vdc to 6.4 bar 10vdc.
E10-10 used with a humidity transmitter ie range 0-100% RH & 0-10vdc output.
A setpoint of 40% represents 40% RH.
A prop band of 20% represents 20% RH (20% of the range) J4 & J5 link on 0-10.
Therefore the output will be 0-10vdc linear over the range from 40% RH 0vdc to 60% RH 10vdc.
If J4 & J5 link is on 10-0 then the output will be 0-10vdc linear over the range from 40% RH 0vdc to 20% RH 10vdc.
WIRING:
E10-10
INPUT
Offset
OV 24V
0V 10VDC
+
+
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
remote
offset
I-V Conv
0-10 Out
0-10 Out
0-10V In
0-10V In
internal
no offset
normal
Out 10-0
Out 10-0
In 4-20mA
In 4-20mA
25
100
%
Setpoint
INSTALLATION:
48
J1 Fit link to internal
J2 To select remote setpoint offset ±5% or no offset
J3 Select I-V Conv to convert a 4-20mA input signal directly to
0-10VDC Output. The setpoint adj has no effect in this mode.
J4 & J5 Set both to 0-10 with rising input above the setpoint,
the output also rises.
Set both to 10-0 with falling input below the setpoint,
the output rises.
4-20mA
50
0
INPUT
0
OV 10VDC
50
%
Prop Band
OUTPUT
J6 & J7 Set both to 4-20mA or 0-10V to select the input signal
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm² rising clamps Min sensor / control signal cable size 7/0.2mm
Screened cable is recommended The screen should be earthed at the controller end only
Keep sensor/control signal wires away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
Input-Output Modules
Section 08
B.M.S INPUT - OUTPUT MODULES ANALOGUE RESCALING VDC / mA
ARM
Input Impedence:
1MΩ Voltage 250Ω Current
This unit can be used to convert / rescale current or
voltage signals:
Consumption: 200mA maximum
VDC input converted to mA output.
mA input converted to VDC output.
mA or VDC input to mA or VDC reversed output.
Enlarging or reducing signals.
LED Power Indicator
Output current: 44mA maximum
Common Applications :
4-20mA in to 0-10vdc out
0-10vdc in to 4-20mA out
Adjustments are made using the potentiometers.
ARM
Reversed Output
Signal / Sensor Range adjustment
Type Supply
± 10%
ARM 24VAC/DC
DIMENSIONS
Input
Adjustable
Output
Adjustable
Ambient
Humidity
Ambient
Temp °C
Mounting
Protection
0 - 44 mA
0 -35 vdc
1 - 44 mA
0.25 - 20 vdc
10 to 95%
non-condensing
0-50
Panel
IP00
94
ARM
6060
31
SETUP :
Factory Calibration -
0-10VDC to 4-20mA
J1 to normal position.
J2 to positive position.
J3 to voltage input, current output.
Apply 0vdc to the input.
Adjust OFFSET for a 4mA output.
Apply 10vdc to the input.
Adjust ATTN for a 20mA output.
No Attenuation of the Input Signal
Voltage Input
Voltage Output
Normal Acting Output Signal
No Offset to the Output Signal
Gain of 1 to the Output Signal (1:1)
Jumper Settings J1 - Output Direction
Reverse
Normal
J2 - Offset Setting
Trim Pots Fully Clockwise
FINE
GAIN = gain of 1
REV = 0 volts reverse
OFFSET = 0 volts offset
Trim Pots Fully Counter-clockwise
ATTN = no input signal attenuation
4-20mA to 0-10VDC
J1 to normal position.
J2 to negative position.
J3 to current input, voltage output.
Apply 4mA to the input.
Adjust OFFSET for a 0vdc output.
Apply 20mA to the input.
Adjust GAIN for a 10vdc output.
The input signal is NOT isolated from the output.
When using a 24VAC supply, all devices connected
to the ARM must use the same ground.
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm .
Min cable size 7/0.2mm. Max length 100m
Keep sensor/control signal wires away from
power cables/units which may cause interference.
Screened cable is recommended
0-10VDC to 8-2VDC
J1 to reverse position.
J2 to no offset position.
J3 to voltage input, voltage output.
Apply 0vdc to the input.
Adjust REV for an 8vdc output .
Apply 10vdc to the input.
Adjust ATTN for a 2vdc output.
0-10vdc to 5-10VDC
J1 to normal position.
J2 to positive position.
J3 to voltage input, voltage output.
Apply 0vdc to the input.
Adjust OFFSET for a 5vdc output.
Apply 10vdc to the input.
Adjust ATTN for a 10vdc output.
0-10VDC to 0-5VDC
J1 to normal position.
J2 to no offset position.
J3 to voltage input, voltage output.
Apply 0vdc to the input.
Check output is 0vdc.
Apply 10vdc to the input.
Adjust ATTN for a 5vdc output.
No Offset
Negative
Positive
J3 - Input / Output Setting
Current Output
Current Input
Voltage Output
Current Input
Current Output
Voltage Input
Voltage Output
Voltage Input
NOTE : Equivalent Calibration voltage = Required Input Signal Amps x 250 (ie. 4mA is 0.004 x 250 =1vdc and 20mA is 0.020 x 250 =5vdc)
Set up the unit with a voltage input and / or output (changing J3) using the formula. If required change J3 back to the correct setting.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
49
Input-Output Modules
B.M.S INPUT - OUTPUT MODULES ANALOGUE BUFFER MODULE 0-10VDC
ABM4
Direct / Buffer / Off Link Selectable
Hand / Auto Link Selectable
This unit can be used to generate / reroute up to
four 0-10vdc signals:
LED Power Indicator
Output Signal Current: 20mA per channel
Applications include - Manual adjustment of the
0-10vdc signal potentiometer can be used to
position actuators etc, providing commissioning
test signals, buffering one signal to drive several
actuators or buffering four signals to drive four
actuators - each of which draws a high input
signal current.
Output Power Current: 6A
Operating Current: 260mA AC 115mA DC
Input Time Constant: 1ms
Manual Output Adjustment
Output Voltage Test Points
ABM4
Terminals: Rising Clamps 0.5-2.5mm²
Type Supply
Input
± 10%
Output
Direct or Buffered
ABM4 24VAC/DC
0 - 10 vdc
0 - 10 vdc
Ambient
Humidity
Ambient
Temp °C
Mounting
Protection
0 to 90%
non-condensing
0-50
Din Rail
IP00
IP1 IP2 IP3 IP4 24V 0V
DIMENSIONS
100
56
POT ADJ.
5
0
5
5
10
HAND
FROM IP1
0
10
FUSE
5
0
0
10
10
HAND
HAND
HAND
FROM IP2
FROM IP3
FROM IP4
FROM IP1
FROM IP1
FROM IP1
LED
FROM IP4
82
DIR
OFF
BUFF
DIR
OFF
BUFF
DIR
OFF
DIR
OFF
BUFF
BUFF
OP 0V 24V OP 0V 24V OP 0V 24V OP 0V 24 V
INSTALLATION:
Selecting Inputs -
Buffering Outputs -
Each output separate Output 1 linked to input 1
Output 2 linked to input 2
Output 3 linked to input 3
Output 4 linked to input 4
Two linked, two separate Output 1 linked to input 1
Output 2 linked to input 1
Output 3 linked to input 3
Output 4 linked to input 4
Two sets of two linked Output 1 linked to input 1
Output 2 linked to input 1
Output 3 linked to input 4
Output 4 linked to input 4
Three linked, one separate Output 1 linked to input 1
Output 2 linked to input 1
Output 3 linked to input 1
Output 4 linked to input 4
All linked Output 1 linked to input 1
Output 2 linked to input 1
Output 3 linked to input 1
Output 4 linked to input 1
Min sensor / control signal cable size 7/0.2mm The screen must be earthed at controller end only EXAMPLES :
HAND
HAND
HAND
HAND
FROM IP1
FROM IP2
FROM IP3
FROM IP4
FROM IP1
FROM IP1
FROM IP1
DIR
FROM IP4
HAND
FROM IP1
HAND
HAND
FROM IP2
FROM IP3
FROM IP4
FROM IP1
FROM IP1
FROM IP1
When an output is set to DIRECT,
the signal is only powered from the
pot in HAND mode or the input in
AUTO mode.
DIR
FROM IP4
HAND
HAND
HAND
FROM IP2
FROM IP3
FROM IP4
HAND
FROM IP1
FROM IP1
FROM IP1
FROM IP1
When the output is set to OFF,
the output signal is open circuit.
DIR
Hand Mode -
FROM IP4
HAND
HAND
HAND
FROM IP2
FROM IP3
FROM IP4
FROM IP1
FROM IP1
FROM IP1
HAND
FROM IP1
When an input link is set to HAND,
the output signal can be set by
adjusting the associated pot.
NOTE -
FROM IP4
HAND
HAND
HAND
HAND
FROM IP1
FROM IP2
FROM IP3
FROM IP4
FROM IP1
FROM IP1
FROM IP1
All the 0v terminals are common.
There must be only one link used
per channel.
FROM IP4
Max length 100m. Screened cable is recommended.
Keep sensor/control signal wires away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
HAND
HAND
HAND
HAND
HAND
HAND
HAND
HAND
HAND
HAND
HAND
FROM IP2
FROM IP3
FROM IP4
FROM IP1
FROM IP2
FROM IP3
FROM IP4
FROM IP1
FROM IP2
FROM IP3
FROM IP4
FROM IP1
FROM IP1
FROM IP1
FROM IP1
FROM IP1
FROM IP1
FROM IP1
FROM IP1
FROM IP1
OFF
DIR
OFF
BUFF
DIR
OFF
BUFF
FROM IP4
FROM IP4
DIR
OFF
BUFF
HAND
BUFF
OFF
BUFF
FROM IP1
DIR
OFF
BUFF
HAND
FROM IP4
OFF
BUFF
DIR
OFF
BUFF
DIR
OFF
BUFF
DIR
OFF
BUFF
DIR
OFF
BUFF
Each output buffered and adjusted by pot.
All outputs buffered and follow input 1.
50
When an output is set to BUFFER
the signal is buffered to 20mA
in both HAND and AUTO modes.
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
DIR
OFF
BUFF
DIR
OFF
BUFF
DIR
OFF
BUFF
DIR
OFF
BUFF
Outputs 1 & 2 buffered and follow input 1.
Output 3 not buffered and follows input 3.
Output 4 buffered and follows pot.
Input-Output Modules
Section 08
TRANSFORMERS
E230..
Max Ambient -10/+50 C
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm rising clamps
Din rail mounting modules used to convert AC
and DC voltages.
Flammability = UL94-V0
If fitting inside an enclosure,
ensure adequate ventilation is
provided as these units can become hot.
E230..
Type Input
±10%
Output
±15%
Primary Fuse
Rating
Secondary Fuse
VA
Rating
Mounting
Enclosure
E230-24AC1
230VAC
24VAC
315mA (T)
1A (T)
25
Din Rail
IP00
E230-24AC2
230VAC
24VAC
315mA (T)
2A (T)
50
Din Rail
IP00
E230-24AC3
E230-24DC1
230VAC
24VAC
315mA (T)
3A (T)
75
Din Rail
IP00
230VAC
24VAC
315mA (T)
1A (T)
-
Din Rail
IP00
Power supplies with other outputs available to special order
DIMENSIONS
E230..
D
W
82
E230-24AC1
E230-24AC1
E230-24AC2
E230-24AC2
E230-24AC3
E230-24AC3
E230-24DC1
E230-24DC1
ACCESSORIES:
EE-M2T Wall mounting enclosure for E230-24AC1.
W
W
113
113
113
113
130
130
113
113
DD
78
78
85
85
90
90
78
78
125H x 125 W x 75D
Protection IP65
This enclosure has no ventilation – therefore do not use on loads above 20VA
DO NOT USE WITH OTHER TRANSFORMERS due to size and ventilation requirements
WIRING:
E230..
_+
24V OUTPUT
230VAC INPUT
N
L
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
51
TIME SWITCHES
Section 09
TIME SWITCHES
ETS..
200 hrs battery reserve
24hrs & 7 days Program
LCD display
LED indicator
Din Rail Mounting
Operating temp: -10/+40oC
Minimum setting time: 1 minute
Current consumption: 4.4W
Life expectancy: 100000 operations
Accuracy +/-1 min per month
These time switches can be used to
control heating, lighting, appliances, etc.
ETS-1CH
Type Channels
Supply
Programs
1
230VAC
8 ON/OFF programs / day
ETS-1CH
DIMENSIONS
Switch Rating
1 x 230VAC
Protection
16(8)A SPDT
IP30
ETS-1CH
37
87
P
72
66
Reset
92
D+ H+ M+
CH1
Reset
CH2
Clock Prog.
WIRING:
N
L
1
2
The live connector must be
protected with a MCB or fuse of
max 16A.
Connect the circuit to be controlled
between terminals:
4 and 3 for a closing function
4 and 5 for an opening function
5
4
3
PROGRAMMING: Setting the Programs
Settings can be programmed for a day or a block of days.
There are six block options:
Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su
Mo Tu We Th Fr
Sa Su
Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa
Mo We Fr
Tu Th Sa
Press the P (Prog.) button to set the first ON setting.
Press D+ (Day) button to select the desired day or block of days.
Then press the H+ (Hour) and M+ (Min.) buttons to set the time.
Once correct press the P button again to validate.
Now set the OFF setting the same way, pressing P to validate
once correct.
Repeat for the remaining ON and OFF settings required.
When all the settings have been programmed press the 'clock'
button and the timer is ready to operate.
52
Day Hours Min.
Manual
Setting the Clock
Press the 'clock' button and hold, simultaneously press the:
D+ button until the correct day
H+ button until the correct hour
M+ button until the correct minute
Then release both buttons and the clock will be set.
Viewing and Changing Settings
Press P several times to view each setting and use the H+ and
M+ buttons to make any time changes if desired, then press P to
validate.
Resetting
To reset the timer press the 'reset' button. This will erase all
clock and program settings.
Manual Override
Use the 'manual' button to override the program by pressing it
several times to select, Permanent ON, Permanent OFF or back
to Auto (Auto mode is the mode which uses the program
settings).
Summer/Winter Changeover
To change from winter to summer time press the 'Hour' and 'Min.'
buttons simultaneously. The clock will be set forward 1 hour and
an "S" will appear in the display.
Repeat this procedure to select winter time.
Random Mode
To enter Random mode press the 'Day' and 'Hour' buttons
simultaneously - an "R" will appear on the display.
The Random mode and programs will work at the same time
separately.
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
EMERGENCY PRODUCTS
Section 10
ALARM INTEGRATOR
EAL..
Volt free contacts
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm rising clamps
EAL.. Provides a common alarm output for
up to 9 separate alarm input signals.
Parallel connection is possible for
additional alarm inputs.
Max ambient 50 C
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-V0
EAL..
Type Input
Max No of
Inputs
Output Switch
230VAC SPST
Consumption
Mounting
Enclosure
EAL-24
24VAC
9
10(3)A
<1VA
Din Rail
IP00
EAL-110
110VAC
9
10(3)A
<1VA
Din Rail
IP00
EAL-230
230VAC
9
10(3)A
<2.5VA
Din Rail
IP00
DIMENSIONS
EAL..
45
50
82
WIRING:
EAL..
L1 L2 L3
L4 L5 L6
When a signal is received on any input - volt free contacts C-NO close
All alarm inputs L1 to L9 must be same voltage and phase
N NEUTRAL
NO NORMALLY OPEN
C COMMON
L LIVE INPUTS
L7 L8 L9
N NO C
The neutral must be common to all alarm inputs
Each input is isolated to prevent backfeed between inputs
Connect output C-NO in parallel to additional units if more than
9 inputs are required.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
53
EMERGENCY PRODUCTS
REMOTE ALARM PANEL
ERA..
Flush Mounting
This product accepts a switched input 230 VAC,
24VAC/DC or a 0-10VDC adjustable input
signal to provide an audible and visual alarm.
Fits square single gang BS box
Protrudes 18mm from wall
ERA..2
Buzzer 70dB at 1m
Enclosure Colour : White suitable
for room mounting.
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-HB
ERA..4
ERA..1 / ERA-230
Type Description
Input ±15%
Supply
Operation
Consumption
Time Delay
Mounting
Enclosure
ERA-230
1 Channel
1 x 230VAC
Light & Buzzer
70mA
-
Flush
IP40
ERA-10-1
1 Channel
1 x 0-10VDC
Light & Buzzer
70mA
0-30s adj.
Flush
IP40
ERA-24-1
1 Channel
1 x 24VAC/DC
Light & Buzzer
70mA
0-30s adj.
Flush
IP40
24VAC/DC
ERA-10-2
2 Channel
2 x 0-10VDC
ERA-24-2
2 Channel
2 x 24VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
ERA-10-4
4 Channel
4 x 0-10VDC
ERA-24-4
4 Channel
4 x 24VAC/DC
DIMENSIONS
ERA..
24VAC/DC
Light & Buzzer
70mA
0-30s adj.
Flush
IP40
Light & Buzzer
70mA
0-30s adj.
Flush
IP40
Light & Buzzer
70mA
0-30s adj.
Flush
IP40
Light & Buzzer
70mA
0-30s adj.
Flush
IP40
86
18
18
ALARM
CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
86
MUTE
ACCESSORIES:
EE-BP5 Surface mounting backbox for ERA..
86
32
86
WIRING:
L
N
230 VAC
ERA-10/24
Drawing shows input terminals, links & time
delays for all versions. These vary according
to the model ordered.
Link J1 - J4 settings:
24V
CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 0V
0V +24V CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
0-10VDC
Sound
24V
10-0V
J4
J3
J2
Time Delays
Switch Point
1
VDC
54
10
J5
0-10V
J1
CH1
0
secs
CH2
30
0
secs
CH3
30
0
secs
CH4
30
0
ERA-230
Alarm condition is indicated by the LED and buzzer switching on.
Pressing the mute button switches off the buzzer.
The LED only switches off when the fault is rectified.
secs
30
If the alarm
input is a 24V
signal, position
links here:
24V
If the alarm input is
a rising 0-10VDC
signal, position
links here:
0-10V
If the alarm input is
a falling 10-0VDC
signal, position
links here:
For 24VAC/DC alarm wire 0V and the 24V switched inputs to CH1, CH2, etc.
For 0-10VDC alarm wire 0V and +24V and all 0-10VDC inputs to CH1,CH2, etc.
Fit link to 0-10 or 24V according to input required. For 0-10vdc the switch point is adjustable.
If the buzzer is not required, remove the SOUND link J5.
If using 0-10vdc input the unit can be set to switch on rising or falling signal via the links J1-J4.
The time delay allows a time period before the unit switches on thus preventing nuisance switching.
Set to zero if not required. Alarm condition is indicated by LED and Buzzer switching on.
Pressing the mute button switches off the buzzer.
The LED only switches off when the input returns to normal.
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm rising clamps Min signal cable size 7/0.2mm Max length 100m.
Screened cable is recommended. The screen should be earthed at controller end only.
Keep control signal wires away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
10-0V
EMERGENCY PRODUCTS
Section 10
PLANT EXTENSION TIMER 0-7 HOURS
EPX..
Flush Mounting
Fits single gang box
This device can be used to turn units on for a
fixed time period or to extend the normal run
time of a system.
Protrudes 18mm from wall
Volt free contact
Enclosure Colour : White - suitable
for room mounting.
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm rising clamps.
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-HB
EPX..
Type Description
Supply
±15%
Output Switch
230VAC
Power
Indication
Consumption
Time
Setting
Enclosure
EPX-24
Plant Extension
24VAC
5(3)A SPST
1VA
LED
0 - 7 hrs
IP40
EPX-230
Plant Extension
230VAC
5(3)A SPST
2.5VA
LED
0 - 7 hrs
IP40
PLEASE NOTE NOW SINGLE GANG
For plant extension without adjustable run time see model EXU..
DIMENSIONS
EPX..
86
18
18
PLANT EXTENSION
7
6
5
4
86
3
2
1
HOURS
ACCESSORIES:
ON/OFF
EE-BP5 Surface mounting backbox for EPX..
86
32
86
WIRING:
EPX..
7
6
N L
0V +
C NO
5
4
3
2
1
HOURS
ON/OFF
Select the run time required by repeatedly pressing the HOURS button and the corresponding LEDs will turn on. These LEDs will also
turn off in sequence during the countdown period. Push the ON/OFF button, contacts C-NO close and the ON/OFF LED turns on to
indicate run time has been extended.
When the selected time period expires, contact C-NO opens and the ON/OFF LED turns off.
The ON/OFF button can be pressed at any time to stop the extended run time - contact C-NO will open and all LEDs will turn off.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
55
EMERGENCY PRODUCTS
PLANT EXTENSION UNIT
EXU..
Flush Mounting
This unit can be wired to a time switch or other
device to extend the normal running time of a
system.
Fits single gang BS box
Protrudes 18mm from wall
Enclosure Colour : White - suitable
for room mounting.
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-HB
EXU..
Type Description
NEON
Voltage
Indication
Light
Push Button
24/230VAC
Enclosure
Setting
EXU-24
Plant Extension
24VAC
NEON
0.5A
IP40
EXU-230
Plant Extension
230VAC
NEON
0.5A
IP40
For adjustable run time 0-7 hours, see model EPX..
DIMENSIONS
EXU..
86
18
18
86
PLANT EXTENSION
ACCESSORIES:
EE-BP5 Surface mounting backbox for EXU..
86
32
86
WIRING:
EPX..
NEON
LIGHT
L
N
PUSH
BUTTON
L
L
When the momentary action push button is pressed a circuit is made.
This can be wired to a time switch which extends the plant running time.
The NEON Light can be wired to show that running time has been extended.
56
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
EMERGENCY PRODUCTS
Section 10
FIREMANS SWITCH
EFM.. EKFM
EFM-1
Fits square outlet box
Protrudes 20mm from wall.
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-V0
Firemans Switch for remote override
of ventilation plant in the event of
fire. All standard types have red
colour enclosures.
EFM-4/5
Enclosure Flammability = Metal
EKFM
Transparent Plastic lid.
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-HB
EXU..
Type Description
Mounting
EFM-1
Key Operated (includes 2 keys)
Flush
Switch rating
230VAC
2 x 10(2)A SPST Volt Free
Operation
3 position
Enclosure
Setting
Normal - Off – Extract
IP40
EKFM
Keyguard for EFM-1
Surface
Once fitted, break lid to access key - see accessories for replacement
IP00
EFM-4
Knob Operated (safe breakglass)
Surface
1 x 10(2)A SPDT Volt Free
Normal - Off – Extract
IP43
EFM-5
Knob Operated (safe breakglass)
Flush
1 x 10(2)A SPDT Volt Free
Normal - Off – Extract
IP40
Special Versions available on request.
DIMENSIONS
EFM-1
EFM-4
87
20
20
190
93
FIREMANS
SWITCH
OFF
NORMAL
EXTRACT
ONLY
NORMAL
87
2 Terminal 1
83
130
EXTRACT
4 Block 3
OFF
FIREMANS OVERRIDE
EKFM
100
EFM-5
142
45
190
29
48
133
26.5
PULL
80
26.5
PULL
17
OFF
125
EXTRACT
ONLY
NORMAL
73
130
19
2 Terminal 1
4 Block 3
19
KEYGUARD
17
FIREMANS OVERRIDE
ACCESSORIES:
* EE-BP6 - Surface mounting backbox for EFM-1
87
EE-KF - Replacement Lid for EKFM
31.5
PULL
87
WIRING:
4 per packEFM-1
PULL
KEYGUARD
EFM-1
EFM-4/5
Terminal Layout
NO
C
3
2
NORMAL
1
2
3
4
OFF
1
2
3
4
EXTRACT
1
2
3
NORMAL
4
OFF
4
1
C
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
NO
EXTRACT
57
EMERGENCY PRODUCTS
DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS
RWE..
Humidity 10% to 85% RH no condensation
Ambient temp: RWE-N 0-70°C
RWE-P 0-60°C
Detects smoke / combustion
products in air moving through HVAC
ducts. Ionisation Model - detects
small smoke particles 0.1-1 micron
and combustion gases as in fast
burning fires. Photoelectric Model best suited to detect large smoke
particles 1-10 micron e.g. PVC
insulation, fabrics & furnishings.
Volt Free Contacts
Power Consumption:Standby: 230VAC 12mA 24VAC 35mA 24VDC 15mA
Alarm: 230VAC 16mA 24VAC 74mA 24VDC 56mA
Remote test & reset facility
Alarm indication light
RWE..
Steel Backbox
Plastic ABS cover Terminals 0.5-2.5mm²
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-V0
Type Detector
head
RWE-N
RWE-P
ST750
ST1500
ST3000
Supply
± 10%
Fault Contact 2 x Alarm Contacts
SPDT
230VAC
230VAC
Ionisation
230 VAC or 24VAC/DC
Photoelectric
230 VAC or 24VAC/DC
INCLUDES 150MM SAMPLING TUBE
750mm
Sampling Tube
1500mm
Sampling Tube
3000mm
Sampling Tube
DIMENSIONS
5(2)A 230VAC
5(2)A 230VAC
10(2)A SPDT
10(2)A SPDT
Air Velocity
min m/s max
10(2)A SPDT
10(2)A SPDT
1.5
1.5
Enclosure
20
20
IP43
IP43
ORDER SAMPLING TUBE ACCORDING TO DUCT WIDTH & CUT TO SUIT
RWE..
DRILLING DETAIL
59
155
131
51
SAMPLING TUBE
95.5
CONDUIT
ENTRY
20
233
Alarm
44.5
2x 35mm dia. HOLES
FOR SAMPLING TUBES
* PANEL ON 30 ANGLE FOR EASY
VIEWING FROM GROUND LEVEL.
Test/Reset
4x 3mm dia. HOLES
FOR DUCT MOUNTING
Pilot
PANEL*
185
WIRING:
Power Connections
115VAC
1
2
3
4
5
+
N
1
2
3
0.1A MAX.
@ 60Hz
POWER CONNECTIONS SEE ABOVE
24VAC / VDC
G
H
ALARM CONTACTS 10A
6
7
8
9
230 VAC
-
5
6
0.2 A MAX. INPUT
ALARM CONTACTS 10A
10
11
12
G
H1
1
2
@ 60Hz
H2
3
4
0.1A MAX.
*TROUBLE CONTACT 10A
13
14
15
REMOTE ACCESSORIES SEE INSTRUCTIONS
16
17
18
19
20
21
INSTALLATION:
PLUG
AIR FLOW
EXHAUST
TUBE
Fit the sampling tube across the entire width of the duct.
The tube can be cut to the required length. Minimum duct width 200mm.
SAMPLING
TUBE
FIT THE PLUG PROVIDED TO THE END OF THE SAMPLING TUBE.
The holes in the sampling tube should face towards the air flow.
ΔP between input & exhaust tubes should be between 0.024 to 3.0 mbar
TOP OF SMOKE DETECTOR
An exhaust tube is provided – this must not be blocked.
The tubes & air flow direction can be reversed.
To prevent false alarms, avoid mounting in areas of extreme high/low temperature, in areas of high humidity or a dusty environment.
The unit should be mounted in a straight duct away from bends or other deflections or turbulent areas.
OPERATION:
Normal / Power On Pilot light on. Fault contacts 14 - 15 close. Alarm light off. Alarm contacts 8-9 & 11-12 open.
Smoke / Power On Pilot light on. Fault contacts 14 - 15 close. Alarm light on. Alarm contacts 8-9 & 11-12 close.
Detector Out/ Power Off Pilot light off. Fault contacts 14 - 13 close. Alarm light off. Alarm contacts 8-9 & 11-12 open.
Testing By keeping the reset/test button depressed a smoke condition is simulated.
Resetting Allow approximately 5 minutes for the smoke to clear from the detector head and then press and release
the reset/test button. The unit returns to a normal condition.
MAINTENANCE:
Periodically clean the tubes & detector head by vacuuming or blowing with compressed air. Do not use chemicals.
58
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
EMERGENCY PRODUCTS
Section 10
RAIN / WATER / LEAK DETECTOR
EW..
EW-230/24
Detects conductive non corrosive liquid/water in
plant rooms, boiler houses, under floors, roofs
etc. DO NOT use with combustible liquids ie
fuels. AC sensor excitation is used for reliable
operation which eliminates the sensor
degradation problems found with DC systems.
Volt free contacts
Max ambient 70°C
Adjustable sensitivity
EW-06
LED indication - light ON when
the sensor is wet.
EW-03
EW-01
Type Unit
EW-230
Switch unit
Supply
± 15%
230 VAC
SPDT
230VAC
10(3)A
Power
Maximum No of Sensors
Consumption
EW-01
EW-03
EW-06
<2.5 VA
10 in parallel
200m
6
EW-24
Switch unit
24VAC
10(3)A
<1.4 VA
10 in parallel
200m
6
Max cable length from the switch unit 200m
EW-01
Probe Sensor
For use with above switch unit
2 wire
Box can be fitted in various locations
EW-03
Cable Sensor
For use with above switch unit
2 wire
3mm dia (Max 200m)
EW-06
Rain Sensor
For use with above switch unit
4 wire
DIMENSIONS
EW-230 / EW-24
Mounting
Enclosure
Din Rail
IP00
Din Rail
IP00
IP40
ORDER PER METREIP00
2 sensor & 2 heater wires 24VAC 1 watt
24VAC Transformer Available)
EW-01
IP65
EW-06
55
50
66
44
28
Rain
Sensor
Grid
89
81
82
72
20
CONDUIT
ENTRY
EE-M1T Enclosure for EW-230 and EW-24
ACCESSORIES:
WIRING:
EW-230 / EW-24
Dims : 125 H x 75 W x 75 D
IP65
Enclosure Flammability UL94- -V2
EW-03
EW-01
EW-06
Use the 2 bare metal wires as shown.
Do NOT connect the 2 PVC coated wires.
Sensor
+
Sensitivity Adj LED
Red Red
White White
Wiring
N
L
+
24VAC/DC
Heater
NC NO C
Sensor
Sensor Dry = C - NC, Sensor Wet = C - NO
INSTALLATION:
Sensor
Before laying the cable ensure damage
has not been caused by handling - make
a continuity test across the 2 bare metal
wires which should be open circuit.
DO NOT USE SCREENED CABLE.
Polarity is not important
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm² Max combined length 200m including sensor cable. Sensitivity may need reducing with long runs.
DO NOT USE SCREENED CABLE. SENSOR CABLE MAY BE EXTENDED USING STANDARD PVC CABLE 7/0.2mm
EW-230/24 With power on and sensor connected, adjust sensitivity until LED is on, then turn back until LED just switches off.
Short circuit the sensor at the furthest point from the switching unit. The LED and relay should switch on. To short circuit the
sensor, press wet fingers or tin foil on to the sensor.
EW-01
EW-03
The switch operates when the liquid touches both probes.
EW-06
The heater can be used to dry the surface after rainfall and to prevent false alarms when dew forms.
Mount the unit at approx 45° to allow rain to fall off. Keep the sensor grid clean and protect from birds.
The cable senses at any point along its entire length. Dirt on the cable can affect the switching. Fix the cable into position using
plastic clips. Separate the two bare metal wires & connect them to the switching unit via standard 2 core unscreened PVC cable.
DO NOT connect the 2 sensor PVC coated wires to the switching unit. Insulate any metallic parts before laying the sensor cable.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
59
EMERGENCY PRODUCTS
CONDENSATION SENSOR CHILLED CEILINGS / BEAMS
ECB-02
Volt free contacts
Used to prevent ‘indoor rain’ with chilled beam /
ceiling systems etc by detecting the early onset
of condensation. Condensation is detected by a
specially treated sensing element fixed directly
to an aluminium sensing plate.
Max ambient 0-60 C
Accuracy ± 3%
Screw Terminals 0.5-2.5mm
For chilled ceilings recommended
setting is approx 80%
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-V0
ECB-02
Type Description
Operation
24V
SPDT
Enclosure
5(2)A
IP30
ECB-02
Switch & sensor
Switch closes on detection of moisture and opens when dry.
DIMENSIONS
ECB-02
85
33
Sensing Plate
55
Hole for electrical cable
The set point adjuster is under the cover.
WIRING:
ECB-02
4
2
1
+
On detection of condensation contacts 1-2 open and 1-4 close.
INSTALLATION:
The unit should be mounted directly onto the coldest part of the pipe/beam.
The unit can be fixed into position by using the cable ties around the mounting bracket. Ensure that good thermal contact is
maintained between the sensing plate and the pipe/beam. Do not allow any space between the contact area.
60
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
HUMIDITY
Section 11
ROOM / DUCT HUMIDISTATS 1-2 STAGES
EHR.. EHD..
Volt free contacts
To monitor humidity in rooms or ducts
and switch extract fans, alarms,
humidifiers or de-humidifiers etc in the
event of high or low humidity level.
Any combination of humidifying or
de-humidifying is possible.
Max. air velocity 15 m/s
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm²
Accuracy ± 3%RH
Media Temp. 0-60°C
0-100% RH non-condensing.
Sensing element - Specially treated plastic
EHR..
strands which do not require regeneration.
EHR.. If humidity level exceeds 85%RH, a low
voltage supply is recommended.
Not suitable for aggressive dirty or dusty media.
EHD..
Enclosure Flammability:
EHR.. = UL94-HB
EHR..V
Type Mounting
Stages
EHR-1
EHR-2
Room
Room
Range
% RH
Difff. per
Stage
1 30/100
2
30/100
4%
4%
Diff. between
Stages
230VAC
SPDT
-
2/15% adj.
5(2)A ConcealedIP30
2 x 5(2)A
Concealed
IP30
5(2)A
2 x 5(2)A
EHR-1V Room
EHR-2V
Room
130/100 4%
2
30/100
4%
-
2/15% adj.
EHD-1
EHD-1W
EHD-2
1 30/100
1 30/100
2
30/100
-
-
3/18% adj.
Duct
Duct
Duct
DIMENSIONS
4%
4%
4%
EHD.. = UL94-V0
Adjustment
Enclosure
Knob IP30
Knob
IP30
15(4)A ConcealedIP54
15(4)A ConcealedIP65
2 x 15(4)A
Concealed
IP54
EHD..
EHR..
47
292
115
70
214
80
10
0
90
80
100
100
40
60
50
30
% RH
70
70
41
65
19.5
6.5
20
ACCESSORIES:
EE-RAD EHR-1
EHR-2
SET POINT
4
70
2
+RH
DEAD BAND
ADJUST
60
80
50
90
40
100
-
4 5 6 3 1 2
70
+RH
2
4
2
% RH
60
50
30
Neutral Zone
Adj. screw
0
10
30
40
STAGE
2
80
1
1
4
90
90
4
Humidifying Only : Contacts 1-4 & 1-4
Dehumidifying Only : Contacts 1-2 & 1-2
Hum & Dehum: Hum stage 1 & De-hum stage 2
0
60
50
70
70
% RH
2
1
30
EHD-2
80
2
40
Stage 1 - humidity rise to scale setting contact 1 - 3 close 1 - 2 open.
Stage 2 - humidity rise above neutral zone, contact 4 - 6 close 4 - 5 open.
Humidifying Only : Contacts 1-2 & 4-5
Dehumidifying Only : Contacts 1-3 & 4-6
Hum & Dehum: Hum stage 1 & De-hum stage 2
EHD-1
4
50
90
+RH
+RH
Humidity rise to scale setting - contact 1 - 4 close.
Humidity fall (diff) - contact 1 - 2 close.
Humidifying Only : Contacts 1-2
Dehumidifying Only : Contacts 1-4
60
80
100
30
1
+RH
SET POINT
+
10
WIRING:
Radiation /Weather shield for EHD
To protect from direct sunlight/weather conditions.
Install vertically as shown only
40
2
2
4
4
+RH
1
1
1
1
1
2
STAGES
Humidity rise to scale setting - contact 1 - 2 close.
Humidity fall (diff) - contact 1 - 4 close.
Stage 1 - humidity rise to scale setting contact 1 - 2 close 1 - 4 open.
Stage 2 - humidity rise above neutral zone contact 1 - 2 close 1 - 4 open.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
61
HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY & TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS 0-10VDC / 4-20mA ROOM / DUCT
EHRT.. EHDT..
Humidity..
0-100% RH non-condensing.
These products can be used to monitor
humidity or humidity + temperature inside
rooms or ducts and give a 0-10vdc/4-20mA
output signal linear across the measuring
range.
Accuracy <2%RH
Linearity and reproducability <0.5%RH at 25 C
Long term stability <2%RH, 12 months
Temperature..
Accuracy <1°C
Linearity <0.5%
Max media -20/+70°C
The humidity sensor is capable of remaining
stable in saturated conditions 100% RH for
short periods. Suitable for use in HVAC &
BMS systems.
EHDT..
Enclosure Flammability EHRT.. UL94-HB
EHDT.. UL94-V0
EHRT..
Type Mounting
Range
%RH
EHRT-2
EHRT-3
EHRT-4
EHRT-5
Room
Room
Room
Room
0/100
0/100
0/100
0/100
EHDT-6
EHDT-7
EHDT-8
EHDT-9
Duct
Duct
Duct
Duct
0/100
0/100
0/100
0/100
OPTIONAL Range
°C
Supply
±15%
Output
Load
Signal
Consumption
mA
Enclosure
&
&
-
-
-10/+50
-10/+50
24VAC/DC
0-10vdc
24VDC
4-20mA loop
24VAC/DC
2x 0-10vdc
24VDC
2x 4-20mA loop
>10KΩ
< 600 Ω
>10KΩ
< 600 Ω
25
30
50
60
IP30
IP30
IP30
IP30
&
&
-
-
-10/+50
-10/+50
24VAC/DC
0-10vdc
24VDC
24VDC
24VAC/DC
2x 0-10vdc
24VDC
2x 4-20mA loop
>10KΩ
<600 Ω
>10KΩ
< 600 Ω
25
30
50
60
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
NTC/PT sensor for two wire temperature resistance output. Available on EHRT-2/3 and EHDT-6/7 models only
Add suffix of sensor required 10K3A1 10K4A1 PT100 PT1000 etc. ie EHRT-2/10K3A1/A, EHDT-6/10K3A1
DIMENSIONS
EHRT..
EHDT..
200
55
85
24
72
85
89
20
20
30
Can be mounted on square or round outlet box
Install the probe at any angle horizontal to downwards.
In areas of high humidity use the duct model and mount with probe facing downwards
Not suitable for dirty, dusty or aggressive media.
ACCESSORIES:
EE-RAD Radiation /Weather shield for EHD
To protect from direct sunlight/weather conditions.
Install vertically as shown only
WIRING:
EHRT-2
EHDT-6
EHRT-3
EHDT-7
EHRT-4
EHDT-8
EHRT-5
EHDT-9
0 /100%RH
1
62
1
24vdc
2
24vac/dc
0-10vdc
Temp
3
0V
1
4
2
3
4
4 “ 20mA
0-10vdc
RH
R=<600ohm
INSTALLATION:
2
0/100%RH
4 “ 20mA
0V
1
3
4 “ 20mA
24vac/dc
2
Temp
0-10vdc
RH
R=<600ohm
24vdc
24vdc
Min sensor / control signal cable size 7/0.2mm Max length 100m. Keep away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
Screened cable is recommended.
The screen should be earthed at controller end only. Terminals 0.5 - 2.5mm
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
LIGHT
Section 12
LIGHT LEVEL TRANSMITTERS 0-10VDC
ELT..
Room sensor can be mounted on
round or square outlet box.
Senses light level and transmits a 0-10VDC
signal linear across the selected range.
Suitable for use with Building Management
Systems.
Consumption < 30mA
Load Resistance >10KΩ
Accuracy ± 3%
Enclosure Flammability:
ELT-4R = UL94-HB
ELT-4W = UL94-V0
ELT-4W
ELT-4R
Type Selectable Range
Lux
Supply
± 10%
Output
Signal
ELT-4R
10/2000, 10/4000, 10/10000, 10/20000
24 VAC/DC
0-10VDC
120°
Room
IP30
ELT-4W
10/2000, 10/4000, 10/10000, 10/20000
24 VAC/DC
0-10VDC
120°
Outside
IP65
Approx Lux levels : Average daylight Minimum for Outdoor Areas Internal Warehouse Areas Minimum task lighting Dusk DIMENSIONS
2000 25 150 200 15 to 20
Vision
Mounting
Angle
Bright Sunlight External walkways/Car Parks Office/Retail Areas Precision Tasks ie assembly, machine operation Enclosure
mA
20000+
50
500
1500
ELT-4W
ELT-4R
55
85
72
89
85
30
20
WIRING:
ELT..
Lux range
selector link
10- 2000
10- 4000
10- 10000
10- 20000
INSTALLATION:
Terminals 0.5 -2.5mm
Screened cable is recommended 0-10vdc
0V
24vac/dc +
Min sensor / control signal cable size 7/0.2mm Max length 100m
The screen should be earthed at controller end only
Keep sensor/control signal wires away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
63
OCCUPANCY
P.I.R. OCCUPANCY DETECTORS CEILING MOUNTED
EO-C..1
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-V0
These units are used for lighting control and
designed to be installed into ceiling tiles. They can
be connected to control circuits or BMS systems.
The EO-CL1 has an in-built adjustable lux sensor
which will switch on the lighting only when ambient
light falls below the pre-set level and movement is
detected. The time delay prevents nuisance
switching and is reset whenever movement is
detected.
Lights switch on when movement
is detected.
EO-CL1
In-built adjustable lux sensor
Set Lux to max. if it is not required.
Range: 10-2000 LUX.
EO-C..1
Type Ceiling
Mounting
Supply
Voltage
Switch Rating
230VAC ±10%
Movement
Time Delay
Enclosure
mA
EO-CO1
Flush
12-24VAC/DC
6A Incandescent
6A Fluorescent 6A SPDT Resistive
10s - 30 mins
IP40
EO-CL1
Flush
12-24VAC/DC
6A Incandescent
6A Fluorescent
6A SPDT Resistive
10s - 30 mins
+ lux sensor
IP40
EE-BP12
Surface Mounting Back Box
INSTALLATION:
Install the unit at least 1m away from any lighting source. Do not mount onto a vibrating surface.
DO NOT MOUNT IN DIRECT SUNLIGHT OR NEAR HEAT SOURCES. In larger areas wire more switches in parallel to power the load.
Flush Mounting: The occupancy detectors may be flush
mounted through a 64mm diameter hole in the ceiling.
Use the plastic mounting bracket and clips supplied
to fix the flush mounted detector.
Adjustable mounting clip
Ceiling tile
64mm diameter hole in ceiling tile
Surface Mounting: Alternatively the detectors can be surface mounted using the optional Back Box, which may be screwed to the ceiling.
DIMENSIONS
60
EO-C..1
EE-BP12 - Surface mounting back box
64
65
59
60
Adjustable
30mm max
Flush mounting bracket
included
76
Top view
DETECTION FIELD:
73
Side view
2.8m
5-7m
5-7m
5-7m
WIRING:
min
max
time
delay
C
NC
NO
64
EO-CL1
EO-CO1
max
min
+
-
50
time
delay
C
NC
NO
max
min
+
-
lux
level
Time Delay Setting (EO-CO & EO-CL):
Timing is adjustable between 10secs to 30mins using the
screwdriver slot labelled TIME.
LUX Setting (EO-CL only):
The LUX level can be adjusted using the screwdriver slot
labelled LUX. Turning towards maximum allows the lights
to come on at a higher ambient light level (set fully to
maximum, lights will be activated regardless of ambient
level).
On movement C-NO closes
No movement C-NO opens (after time delay)
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
OCCUPANCY
Section 13
P.I.R. OCCUPANCY DETECTORS
EO..
These units are used for lighting control. They can
be connected to control circuits or BMS systems.
The EO-NF has an in-built adjustable lux sensor
which will switch on the lighting only when ambient
light falls below the pre-set level and movement is
detected. The time delay prevents nuisance
switching and is reset whenever movement is
detected
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm²
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-V0
EO-NF
Directly replaces a light switch
No neutral connection is required.
Manual On-Off switch.
In-built adjustable lux sensor
Set Lux to max. if it is not required.
EO-NF / SF / SC
Suitable for direct connection to lights.
EO-VF / VC
Suitable for use with BMS systems
Volt free contacts
Flush mounting units fit square BS box
Unit protrudes 19mm + bulb from wall.
EO-S.. / EO-V..
EO-NF
Type Ceiling
Mounting
Supply
Voltage
Switch Rating
230VAC ±10%
Movement
Time Delay
Enclosure
mA
5 - 60 mins
+ lux sensor
IP40
EO-NF
Flush
Switched live + on/off switch
No neutral required
10A Incandescent 6A Compact Fluorescent
6A Fluorescent with Power Factor Capacitor
EO-SF
Flush
Switched live
Neutral required
10A Incandescent 6A Fluorescent 16A Resistive
10s - 60 mins
IP40
EO-SC
Ceiling
Switched live
Neutral required
10A Incandescent 6A Fluorescent 16A Resistive
10s - 30 mins
IP40
EO-VF
Flush
live & neutral + SPDT
7A Resistive
10s - 60 mins
IP40
EO-VC
Ceiling
live & neutral + SPDT
7A Resistive
10s - 60 mins
IP40
OPTIONAL
L24 = 24VAC supply
DIMENSIONS
EO-NF
EO-SF / EO-VF / EO-SC / EO-VC
23
87
23
87
19
87
19
87
DETECTION FIELD:
WALL MOUNTED
Top view
CEILING MOUNTED
Side view
Top view
Side view
3-4 m
3-4 m
7m
2.8m
5-7m
5-7m
7m
7m
DO NOT MOUNT IN DIRECT SUNLIGHT OR NEAR HEAT SOURCES. In larger areas wire more switches in parallel to power the load.
WIRING:
EO - NF
EO - SF / SC
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
EO - VF / VC
65
OCCUPANCY
MICROWAVE OCCUPANCY DETECTORS
MWS1
These detectors detect movement within its range
and can be used to control lighting, heating or
water shut off functions. An adjustable integral light
level sensor will inhibit the switching on of lights if
the ambient lighting is already sufficient. Adjustment
of light level, time delay and sensitivity is by a hand
held programming handset UHS5 which should be
ordered at the same time.
Size 86x86x22 projecting from wall.
Adjustable time delay 10 secs to 99min.
Terminals 2.5mm².
Casing flame retardant ABS class 2.
Wall mount 1.2 to 1.5 metres from floor.
MWS1
Type
Mounting
Supply
Load
Power consumption
MWS1A-PRM
Flush, wall mounting
230VAC
10A
ON 1.15W OFF 790mW
16A resistive/
10A inductive
ON 1.01W OFF 790mW
MWS1A-PRM-LV
Flush,wall mounting
24VDC
UHS5
Hand Set (Not included – Order separately)
DIMENSIONS
DETECTION PATTERN
WIRING:
PROGRAMMING USING THE HAND SET
MWS1A-PRM
MWS1A-PRM-LV
Neutral
+
Live
-
Circuit protection
(if required)
N
N
L
L/OUT
Default
Value
0
SHIFT 1
1
SHIFT 2
SHIFT 1
2
SHIFT 2
SHIFT 1
3
SHIFT 2
SHIFT 1
UHS5 Handset Graphics
Description
SHIFT 2
Button Activation
Live out
Neutral
NO
NC
Load
Number of Shift key presses
Parameter
Name
-
NC NO
+ COM
On / Raise
On
Turn lights on.
Off / Lower
Off
Turn lights off.
Walk test
Off
On
Off
When set to On this causes a red LED to
flash on the sensor when it detects
movement. Use this feature to check for
adequate sensitivity levels.
Time Out
(Time
adjustment)
10 mins
1, 10 &
20
minutes
5, 15 &
30
minutes
Once the detector is turned on, this value
sets how long the lights will stay on once
movement has ceased.
Lux on level 9
(Switch
level on)
2, 5 & 7
4, 6 & 9
Lux level setting to prevent the luminaires
being switched on if the ambient light level
is sufficient (adjustable between 1
and 9). The luminaires will always be
switched on at level 9.
Lux off level 9
(Switch
level off)
2, 5 & 7
4, 6 & 9
Lux level setting to switch the luminaires off
during occupancy if the ambient light level
goes above the setting (adjustable between
1 and 9). Level 9 will always keep the lights
on. This setting can be used for “window
row switching”.
Sensitivity
1, 5 & 9
3, 6 & 8
Sensitivity level for detecting movement.
1 = low sensitivity
9 = high sensitivity
9
Defaults
Presence /
Absence
D
Presence Presence
Absence
Returns the unit to the default settings.
Absence mode not implemented—do not
use.
INSTALLATION
Do not site within 1m of any lighting or ventilation equipment.
Do not fix to a vibrating surface.
Site as far as possible from the surface of metal objects.
Shift
Use this button to select the settings in red
and blue signified by the ‘Shift 1’ and ‘Shift
2’ LEDs
Point the hand set at the Sensor and send the required programming commands
to the unit as shown below. Valid commands will be indicated by a green LED
flash.
NOTES:
The microwave radiation emitted by these units is of extremely low power. At a distance greater than 50mm the power density is less than 6% of the ANSI IEE
C95.1-1991 power density. At a distance of 5mm from the unit it is less than 84% of the recommended power density.
66
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
AIR QUALITY & GAS SENSORS
Section 14
GAS DETECTOR/TRANSMITTER
EGS-…
Do not expose to extreme ambient or oily/dirty
conditions.
This range of gas detectors can be used
to detect leaks and provide an alarm
in general commercial and industrial
applications.
24VAC supply, green power led.
Red led and sounder alarm.
Can be used stand alone, with a BMS
system or with a monitor panel.
Volt free alarm relay rating 1A-Factory set
threshold.
Analogue output 0 to 10VDC or 4-20mA
Dimensions
86x120x53
180gm
Standard housing IP41
Gas Sensor (Specify Gas)
Type
Gas
EGS-NG
Nat Gas ( methane)
EGS-LPG
LP Gas
EGS-CO
Carbon monoxide
EGS-R134
Refrig R134
EGS-H
Hydrogen EGS-CO2/IR
Carbon dioxide
ECS-OZOzone
EGS-O
Oxygen
EGS-H2S
Hydrogen sulphide
EGS-SD
Sulphur dioxide
EGS-ND
Nitrogen dioxide
EGS-CL
Chlorine
Range
Relay set point
0 to 5,000ppm
0 to 2,000ppm
0 to 100ppm
0 to 1000ppm
0 to 2,000ppm
0 to 10,000ppm
0-1ppm
0 to 25%
0 to 30ppm
0 to 10ppm
0 to 10ppm
0 to 10ppm
2500ppm
1000ppm
30ppm
500ppm
1000ppm
5000ppm
0.2ppm
19%.
5ppm
2ppm
3ppm
0.5ppm
Other gases-please enquire Default setpoints are in accordance with www.hse.gov.uk/coshh/table1.pdf
Optional Housings
DUCT
EE-HSGDUCT
WIRING
ROOM
EE-HSGIP66
HAZARDOUS AREA
EE-HSGEx
INSTALLATION
NATURAL GAS / METHANE / AMMONIA
The unit should be
positioned at high/mid/low
level depending on the
density of the gas being
detected.
30cm
CARBON MONOXIDE
160 - 200cm
Use 2 cores of a 4 core 7/0.2mm sq cable
GAS
PLANT
LPG/PROPANE / REFRIGERANT
30cm
OPERATION
Do not connect the 0 volt terminals.
See the detailed instructions in the Product Data sheets
supplied with the product.
MAINTENANCE
Keep the gas sensors energised and after installation or a period of non use energise the sensor for at least 15mins to allow it to stabilise.
Test annually or in accordance with the local regulations as detailed in the Product Data sheet.
Do not store of install in dusty dirty environments or areas of high solvent concentration.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
67
AIR QUALITY & GAS SENSORS
GAS MONITOR PANELS
EGD-M./ST-MON350
This range of gas sensor monitor panels can be used with EGS
or ST-.. gas sensors and provide a centralised display of sensor
alarm status with visual and audible alarms. By choosing the
appropriate sensor and monitor panel up to 65 sensors can be
accommodated.
EGD - M
EGD-M1
EGD-M2
EGD-M4
EGD-M6
ST-MON350
ST-MON 350R
EGS
EGS
EGS
EGS
ST-..only
ST-..only
1
2
4
6
up to 32
from 32 to 65 sensors
WIRING EGS sensors to EGD-M.. monitor panels
230VAC
230VAC
230VAC
230VAC
230VAC
230VAC
2
2
2
2
2
2
orange/red led
orange/red led
orange/red led
orange/red led
240x64 graphic lcd
240x64 graphic lcd
192x100x75
192x100x75
262x255x82
262x255x82
232x235x60
232x235x60
WIRING ST-.. sensors to ST-MON350 monitor panels
The mains supply should be via a 2pole isolating switch fused at
1A.Use 3x0.75mm sq cable.
See the detailed instructions in the Product Data sheets supplied
with the product.
INSTALLATION
Avoid extremely hot, cold or humid environments, strong magnetic fields or direct sunlight.
OPERATION
See the detailed instructions in the Product data sheets supplied with the product.
68
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
.
AIR QUALITY & GAS SENSORS
Section 14
AIR QUALITY TRANSMITTER 0-10VDC
EAQ..
These products can be used to detect a mixture
of pollutant gases in the air ie cigarette smoke,
odours and other gases generally found within
clubs, pubs, restaurants, kitchens, smoking areas
etc. The 0-10vdc linear output signal is
proportional to the contamination level produced
and can be used to control fresh air dampers or
fans etc. A solid state element is used to sense
contaminant gases.
Type Mounting
Supply
±15%
EAQ-R1
EAQ-D1
Output
Load
Signal
EAQ..Transmitters should not be used
to detect Carbon Dioxide (CO2). CO2
transmitters are ideal for use in clean
areas ie. theatres, conference rooms.
SEE SEPARATE DATA SHEET ON
CARBON DIOXIDE TRANSMITTERS.
EAQ-R1
Fits square or round outlet box.
Enclosure Flammability:
EAQ-R1 = UL94-HB
EAQ-D1 = UL94-V0
Consumption
mA
Ambient
Temp °C
Accuracy
Approx
Enclosure
EAQ-R1 Room
24VAC/DC
0-10vdc >10 KΩ
<110
0/50
±5%
IP30
EAQ-D1 Duct
24VAC/DC
0-10vdc >10 KΩ
<110
0/50
±5%
IP65
DIMENSIONS
EAQ-R1
EAQ-D1
55
200
85
72
30
30
89
20
Room transmitters must not be used with
excessively oily, dusty, dirty or aggressive m edia
(see duct model). Mount approx 1.6 - 2m high,
in an area with good air movem en t.
Avoid areas of localised pollution, heat etc.
Install in the return air duct. Avoid ducts where excessive oily, dusty,
dirty or aggressive media may be present ie, kitchens. In this case the
duct transmitter should be wall mounted inside the kitchen. A filter is
fitted to the probe to overcome minor dust, turbulence & velocity
problems. Ensure that the filter does not become blocked.
Best results are achieved within controlled media temperatures between approx. 16 - 28°C.
At lower temperatures the output voltage may increase as temperature falls. Media Limits: 0 / +50°C 0-80% RH non-condensing.
WIRING:
ZERO
SPAN
Link RUN for normal operation and 0vdc adjustment.
+ 24vac/dc
RUN
Link SET SPAN to adjust 8-10vdc.
SET
SPAN
Turn time delay to min when making adjustments.
0V
TIME DELAY
0-10vdc
1
OPERATION:
vdc
poor
10
8
100%
Allow approx 30 minutes for the device to stabilise after switching on.
The sensing element will self-clean any dust which may have settled
during storage. On initial power up the output will be 10vdc and this will
reduce slowly during the self-cleaning process. On-site adjustments are not
normally necessary. If any adjustments are required, they should only be
carried out after the burn-in period, in clean air and with the time delay set to 0%.
The following adjustments can then be made if necessary:
6
SPAN - Fit link to SET SPAN & adjust to 8-10V indicating bad air quality.
4
ZERO - Fit link to RUN and adjust to 0V when clean air is detected.
2
good
0
Air Quality
TIME DELAY - Set to 0% for fast response, 100% for slow response.
This overcomes problems if the air quality changes for a short period.
The response time will also be affected by air movement, temperature
and contamination rates.
The transmitter output should be below 2vdc when little or no contaminant is present in the air ie in periods of low or no occupancy.
Dampers can therefore be set to minimum fresh air or to close at approx 2vdc. As the air quality worsens the output signal increases
to modulate the dampers to the fresh air position or to fully open at about 8-10vdc.
Min sensor cable size 7/0.2mm
Max length 100m. Screened cable is recommended.
INSTALLATION: Terminals 0.5-2.5mm²
The screen should be earthed at controller end only
Keep sensor wires away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
69
AIR QUALITY & GAS SENSORS
CARBON DIOXIDE TRANSMITTER 0-10VDC / 4-20mA
ECD..
These devices detect the
presence of Carbon Dioxide only
and give a 0-10vdc or 4-20mA
output signal linear across the
range. Suitable for use in clean
areas such as no-smoking rooms,
theatres, conference rooms etc.
Sensing element : Non-dispersive Infra Red.
Repeatability ±20ppm
Sensor Accuracy 0-2000ppm ±75ppm
2min Response time
Calibration interval 3 years dependant on conditions.
ECD-D2
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-HB
ECD-R2
Type Mounting
Range PPM
Programmable
Supply
± 15%
Output
Selectable
Consumption
Max
Media
Temp °C
Media
Humidity %RH
Enclosure
ECD-R2
ECD-D2
Room 1000-7500
24VAC/DC
0-10vdc/4-20mA 100mA
0/50
5/95
IP30
Duct 1000-7500
24VAC/DC
0-10vdc/4-20mA 100mA
0/50
5/95
IP64
DIMENSIONS:
ECD-R2
ECD-D2
9.5 “
240 mm
4.7“
119 mm
3.95 “
100 mm
1.15 “
29 mm
3.3“
84 mm
5.7 “
145 mm
ECD-R2
WIRING:
ECD-D2
INSTALLATION:
ECD-R2
Install in a clean environment in an area with good air
movement. Mount in g height 1.5 - 2m
Avoid areas of localised heat, windows, doors etc
ENSURE VENT HOLES ARE FACING DOWN.
ECD-D2
Install in a clean environment in the return air duct.
Position the unit away from heat sources.
The holes in the tubes should face parallel to the air flow.
The direction of air flow can be reversed.
SET UP USING THE MENU FUNCTION
Eight functions can be set up using the menu using the tree buttons
MENU To enter sey up or advance to the next step.
ROLL
To change the programme variables.
SAVE
To save to memory and advance to the next item.
Press MENU to enter the set up menu.
Out high Change the range between 1000 and 75ooppm.
Alititude Set to local altitude.
Auto Call Corrects sensor drift - O
N if varing CO2 level.
OFF if constant CO2 level.
70
Out type
Text
Calibrat
Restore
Defaults
Select 0-5VDC or 0-10VDC. If mA/Volt switch is
set to mA then mA will be displayed.
Used for 1000ppm gas calibration.
SAVe to restore defaults or MENU to exit.
Press SAVE to exit menu.
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
WIND SPEED AND DIRECTION LEVEL
Section 15
WIND SPEED AND DIRECTION SENSORS
EWS..
Electrical connection 3m cable.
These products are suitable for measuring
wind speed or wind speed and direction in such
applications as automatic window closure in
high wind conditions or general monitoring
applications. They can be operated with zero
power and are suitable for wiring into BMS
systems.
Max Ambient -20/+70°C
A mounting bracket is provided suitable
for mounting onto a horizontal/vertical
pole - Max pole diameter 50mm.
Flammability - Anodised aluminium
assembly with plastic cups and vane.
EWSD-2..
Switch1
Rating
Max
Current
EWS-4
Wind Speed 0-90m/s switch contact
1 pulse/1.493m
0-100 VDC Max
0-50W DC resistive
EWSD-2
Wind Speed 0-90m/s switch contact
&
1 pulse/1.493m
Direction
0-360°
0-100 VDC Max
0.5A
0-50W DC resistive
0-24VDC
0-1 kΩ pot 0-357°
endless travel
0.5A
0-24VDC
Start
Speed
Accuracy Protection
0.5m/s from zero wind speed
2% IP65
0.5m/s from zero wind speed
3° headband at North
2% IP65
SPECIAL ORDER
ONLY
Type Application Range Output Speed measurement - magnetic reed switch producing one contact closure per rotation, which is equivalent to 1.493m travel.
Counting this over a time period produces a rate in m/s.
10000 revolutions per hour = 14930 metres per hour = 14.93 Km/h = 4.148 m/s m/s x 3.6 = km/h.
DIMENSIONS
Wind speed cups
Elbow must
face North
280
3m cable
Direction vane
Mounting bracket
WIRING:
210
EWS-4
100R
Switch
EWSD-2
1 Green
2 Black
100R
24V
WIND SPEED
Pulsed/output switch
1K
Potentiometer
WIND SPEED
Switch
DIRECTION
100K
1
Green
2
Black
3
White
(not used)
4
Black
(not used)
5
Red
IN
6
Black
0V
24V Pulsed /
output switch
The 3m cable can be extended using screened 7/0.2mm wire equivalent to Belden 9503. The screen is not connected in the sensor
and should be earthed at the controller end. Keep away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
INSTALLATION:
The unit should be mounted on a pole at a height of about 2m.
Situate the unit in a clear site which is most representative of the area to be monitored.
Avoid extremes ie hilltops which may indicate increased wind speeds, or valleys and in close proximity to trees and buildings
which may indicate decreased wind speeds due to shielding.
Several sensor heads can be installed to give spatial coverage and thus achieving more precise results.
Ensure the elbow points NORTH using a compass or gently rotate the vane until 0 or 357 is indicated on a suitable measuring
instrument, as this will represent North. Fix and tighten the bracket at this position.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
71
Wind Speed / Direction Level
WIND SPEED & DIRECTION SENSOR 0-10 VDC
EWSD-10
Max Ambient -20/+70°C
A bracket is provided suitable for
mounting onto a mast of diameter
between 30 - 50mm.
This product is suitable for measuring wind
speed, wind direction or both. It can be used
for automatic window closure in high wind
conditions or general monitoring applications
with BMS systems.
Flammability: Anodised aluminium alloy
UPVC & Stainless Steel assembly with
polypropylene cups.
The 0-10vdc output signal is linear for both
wind speed & direction.
Electrical connection 25m 4-core
screened cable supplied as standard.
This can be extended up to 200m Max.
Consumption 40mA Max.
EWSD-10
Type Application Supply
Range
±15%
Output
2 x 0-10VDC
Start Speed
Approx.
Typical
Accuracy
Resolution
Protection
EWSD-10 Wind Speed 24VAC/DC
0 - 50 m/s 0 - 10VDC
<0.5 m/s
±5% or 1.5 m/s < 0.5 m/s
IP65
Sensor
Direction
0 - 360°
IP30
Control Box
0V = 10°
<0.5 m/s
5° typical (10° worst)
< 1°
5V = 180° (South)
10V = 360° (North)
Speed measurement - Hall Effect solid state magnetic switch activated by magnets in the cup rotor.
DIMENSIONS
EXAMPLE: WIND DIRECTION
68
Direction
vane
10V
360°
N
25
160
0V
10°
Control Box
Elbow must
face North
114
260
7.5V
270°
W
2.5V
90°
E
Wind speed cups
2 x 0-10VDC
Output
Mounting
bracket
145
5V
180°
S
240
25m Cable
WIRING:
Wind Sensor
Direction
Common.
Speed
Cable from
wind Sensor
+ 5V Red
Direction Yellow
Screen Black
Speed Blue
Control Box
0V
+
24V
Output
Keep away from power cables/units which may
cause interference.
Screened cable is recommended.
The screen should be earthed at the controller end only.
Terminals 0.5 - 1.5mm²
Wind speed output 0-10VDC
Common 0V
Wind Direction output 0-10VDC
Supplied with the control box which converts the sensor signal to a standard 0-10 volt output signal.
INSTALLATION:
72
The unit should mounted to a mast with a diameter of between 30-50 mm with the supplied V-shaped clamp and bracket.
Situate the unit in a clear site which is most representative of the area to be monitored.
Avoid extremes ie hilltops which may indicate increased wind speeds, or valleys and in close proximity to trees and buildings
which may indicate decreased wind speeds due to shielding.
Several sensor heads can be installed to give spatial coverage and thus achieving more precise results.
Ensure the elbow points NORTH using a compass or gently rotate the vane until 0° or 357° is indicated on a suitable measuring
instrument, as this will represent North. Fix and tighten the bracket at this position.
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
air velocoty
Section 16
AIR VELOCITY / AVERAGING PITOT TUBES
EVP..
INSTALLATION:
For smaller ducts the tubes can be
cut to length. The end plugs must
then be refitted.
Mount away from bends, elbows and
turbulent areas.
Each flange has a neoprene gasket.
These units consist of tubes with holes along the
length which can be used to sense the average
air velocity across air ducts. Suitable for use with
our EDT.. Air Differential Pressure Transmitters.
EVP..
EVP-300 / EVP-500 - These units can
be installed from outside the duct and
the tubes are self-supporting.
Type Length between flange(s)
mm
Mounting
Pressure Connection
Tube Material
300
500
1 Flange
1 Flange
Brass 6mm Push-on
Brass 6mm Push-on
Brass 6mm OD
Brass 6mm OD
EVP-300
EVP-500
Longer lengths are avaiable to special order.
EVP..
DIMENSIONS
50
L
+
-
6
PLUG
6
PLUG
Senses total pressure.
50
24
+
8
A
8
13
40
Holes must face air flow directly
Total Pressure
Flow
Senses static pressure. Rotate tube up or down towards
position 'A' approx angle 36-42° to obtain correct Velocity
Pressure for the required Air Velocity.
Velocity Pressure = Total Pressure - Static Pressure
Flow
Static Pressure
Ensure that the
arrow on the
flange plate points
in the direction of
air flow.
CALCULATIONS:
To calculate the Air Velocity, use table below
or the following equation:
Air Velocity =
2 x Velocity Pressure
1.2
Example: Velocity Pressure is 62.42 Pa
This equates to 10.2m/s Air Velocity *
When velocity pressure is established, the
ADP Transmitter can be selected, ie with a
range of 0 - 100 Pa.
TABLE OF VELOCITY PRESSURE IN PASCALS AGAINST VELOCITY IN METRES PER SECOND
m/s
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 *
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
0
0.00
0.60
2.40
5.40
9.60
15.00
21.60
29.40
38.40
48.60
60.00
72.60
86.40
101.40
117.60
135.00
153.60
173.40
194.40
216.60
240.00
264.60
290.40
317.40
345.60
375.00
405.60
437.40
470.40
504.60
540.00
0.1
0.01
0.73
2.65
5.77
10.09
15.61
22.33
30.25
39.37
49.69
61.21
73.93
87.85
102.97
119.29
136.81
155.53
175.45
196.57
218.89
242.41
267.13
293.05
320.17
348.49
378.01
408.73
440.65
473.77
508.09
543.61
0.2 *
0.02
0.86
2.90
6.14
10.58
16.22
23.06
31.10
40.34
50.78
62.42 *
75.26
89.30
104.54
120.98
138.62
157.46
177.50
198.74
221.18
244.82
269.66
295.70
322.94
351.38
381.02
411.86
443.90
477.14
511.58
547.22
0.3
0.05
1.01
3.17
6.53
11.09
16.85
23.81
31.97
41.33
51.89
63.65
76.61
90.77
106.13
122.69
140.45
159.41
179.57
200.93
223.49
247.25
272.21
298.37
325.73
354.29
384.05
415.01
447.17
480.53
515.09
550.85
0.4
0.10
1.18
3.46
6.94
11.62
17.50
24.58
32.86
42.34
53.02
64.90
77.98
92.26
107.74
124.42
142.30
161.38
181.66
203.14
225.82
249.70
274.78
301.06
328.54
357.22
387.10
418.18
450.46
483.94
518.62
554.50
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
0.5
0.15
1.35
3.75
7.35
12.15
18.15
25.35
33.75
43.35
54.15
66.15
79.35
93.75
109.35
126.15
144.15
163.35
183.75
205.35
228.15
252.15
277.35
303.75
331.35
360.15
390.15
421.35
453.75
487.35
522.15
558.15
0.6
0.22
1.54
4.06
7.78
12.70
18.82
26.14
34.66
44.38
55.30
67.42
80.74
95.26
110.98
127.90
146.02
165.34
185.86
207.58
230.50
254.62
279.94
306.46
334.18
363.10
393.22
424.54
457.06
490.78
525.70
561.82
0.7
0.29
1.73
4.37
8.21
13.25
19.49
26.93
35.57
45.41
56.45
68.69
82.13
96.77
112.61
129.65
147.89
167.33
187.97
209.81
232.85
257.09
282.53
309.17
337.01
366.05
396.29
427.73
460.37
494.21
529.25
565.49
0.8
0.38
1.94
4.70
8.66
13.82
20.18
27.74
36.50
46.46
57.62
69.98
83.54
98.30
114.26
131.42
149.78
169.34
190.10
212.06
235.22
259.58
285.14
311.90
339.86
369.02
399.38
430.94
463.70
497.66
532.82
569.18
0.9
0.49
2.17
5.05
9.13
14.41
20.89
28.57
37.45
47.53
58.81
71.29
84.97
99.85
115.93
133.21
151.69
171.37
192.25
214.33
237.61
262.09
287.77
314.65
342.73
372.01
402.49
434.17
467.05
501.13
536.41
572.89
73
air velocoty
AIR VELOCITY TRANSMITTER 0-10VDC
EAV..
Accuracy ±1% at mid range at 20°C
Response time < 2s
To measure the air velocity in HVAC ducts and
provide a linear 0-10vdc output signal across
the range. The unit operates on a thermal
principle based on the cooling effect from the
air speed.
Media Temp -10/+60°C
Media Humidity 0/80%RH
Max Ambient -20/+60°C
Allow 15s for the unit to stabilise when
it is first switched on.
Consumption 85mA
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-V0
EAV..
Type Mounting
Range
m/s
Supply
±15%
Output
Signal
Load
Enclosure
EAV-4
Duct 0/4
24VAC/DC
0-10vdc
>10KΩ
IP65
EAV-8
Duct 0/8
24VAC/DC
0-10vdc
>10KΩ
IP65
EAV-16
Duct 0/16
24VAC/DC
0-10vdc
>10KΩ
IP65
DIMENSIONS
EAV..
200
55
89
8
20
Ensure that the air flows directly through the holes in the side of the probe. The air can enter the holes from either side.
Mount away from bends, elbows and turbulent areas. Avoid installi.ng in areas where the temperature in the duct changes rapidly.
DO NOT SUBJECT THE SENSING ELEMENT TO OILY, DIRTY, DUSTY OR MOIST MEDIA.
WIRING:
EAV..
0V
24vac/dc
0-10vdc
INSTALLATION:
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm
_
+
1
2
3
Min sensor / control signal cable size 7/0.2mm Screened cable is recommended. The screen should be earthed at controller end only.
Keep sensor/control signal wires away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
74
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
Max length 100m.
Current Switches / Sensors
Section 17
CURRENT SWITCHES FIXED SWITCH POINT
ESOL.. ESLT....
Hysteresis: <2% Full Scale max
These units are powered by induction from the
monitored AC conductor which passes through
the hole/core. They sense current flow and can
monitor the operation/failure of fans, pumps,
motors etc. Simply connect 2 wires to indicate
run /fail - the normally open switch contacts close
when the setpoint is exceeded. The GNG models
incorporate dry contacts for true digital switching.
Enclosure Flammability: UL94-V0
Input Frequency Range: 50/60 Hz
Operating Temperature: 15 to 60°C
RH: 5 - 90%
ESLT..
Response Time: <200mS
ESOL.
Type Description
Switch Rating Max
On State Volt Drop
@ 24vdc @150mA
Leakage
Current
Set
Point
Conductor Current Input Range
ESOL-GNG-200 Solid Core
30VAC/VDC 0.5A
<0.1V
<25μA
0.75A Fixed
0.5 - 200A
ESLT-GNG-200
30VAC/VDC 0.5A
<0.1V
<25μA
2.0A Fixed
2.0 - 200A
Split Core
On State Volt Drop - amount of voltage which drops through the switch contacts when they are closed.
Leakage Current - amount of current leaked across the switch contacts when they are open.
Both factors are very small and generally insignificant for most applications.
If the conductor current is too low ie 0.5A, it can be looped through the current switch more than once
ie 3 loops = 1.5A, this also divides the maximum range by 3.
If the conductor wire is too large, or the current too high it can be wired to the primary side of a current transformer,
the secondary side then passes through the current switch hole/core.
Easy to use switches, for flow/no flow applications with dry contacts for true digital switching.
Do NOT exceed the voltage or current ratings as this will cause damage to the device.
Normally Open switch contacts close when the current flow exceeds the set point.
DIMENSIONS
INSTALLATION:
ESOL-GNG-200
ESLT-GNG-200
Ensure core is clean at time of installation as dirt/foreign particles may prevent correct operation.
The split core device can be opened by using a large blade screwdriver positioned in the centre of the latch.
When closing the split core ensure that the two halves are properly aligned. Pass the live conductor/wire through the core.
The solid state switch contacts can only be checked for operation when the switch circuit power is applied.
Under current indication : Belt, fan or pump failure : For normal running the current should be above the set point & the switch contact
closed. If the belt is broken, fan or pump stopped or the electrical supply fails the switch contact will open.
Over current indication : Locked rotor. For normal running the current should be below the setpoint and the switch contact should be
open. When current exceeds the set point the switch contact closes providing indication of current flows above the normal full load amps.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
75
Current Switches / Sensors
CURRENT SWITCHES ADJUSTABLE SET POINT
ESOL.. ESLT..
These devices are powered by induction from the
monitored AC conductor which passes through
the hole/core. They sense the current flow and
can thereby monitor the operation/failure of fans,
pumps, motors, etc.
ESLT-325NSC
Hysteresis: <2% Full scale max
Enclosure Flammability: UL94-V0
Operating Temperature: 0 to 70°C
The Normally Open triac switch closes when the
current flow exceeds the set point. The switch
point is adjustable via a multi turn pot.
ESOL-325NS
Response Time: <200mS
Type Description
Switch Rating Max
Input Frequency Range
Leakage
Current
Set
Point
Conductor Current Input Range
ESOL-325NS
Solid Core
250VAC
1A
10 - 400Hz
<1mA
Adj
1.25-6, 6-40, 40-200A
ESLT-325NSC
Split Core
250VAC
1A
10 - 400Hz
<1mA
1.5-200A
On State Volt Drop - amount of voltage which drops through the switch contacts when they are closed.
Leakage Current - current leaked aross the switch contacts when they are open.
Both factors are very small and generally insignificant for most applications.
DIMENSIONS
ESOL-325NS
ESLT-325NSC
30
89
30
100
66
63
19
22
22
Mounting holes
2 x 5dia on 76 centres
Mounting holes
2 x 5dia on 88 centres
WIRING:
LINK
LOAD
T1
CCW TO INCREASE
SET POINT
H M
NON
POLARISED
NON
POLARISED
230
VAC
INSTALLATION:
CCW TO
INCREASE
SET POINT
ESOL-325NS L1
ESLT-325NS
A
LINK
40-200
6-40
1.5-6 NONE
LINK
A
NONE 1-6
M
6-40
H 40-200
ESOL-325NS
ESLT-325NS
Ensure core is clean as dirt/foreign particles may prevent correct operation. If the conductor current is too low ie 0.5A, loop through
the sensor more than once, ie 3 loops = 1.5A, this also divides the maximum range by 3. If the conductor wire is too large, or the
current too high it can be wired to the primary side of a current transformer, the secondary side then passes through the hole/core.
Do NOT exceed the voltage or current ratings as this will cause damage to the device. Pass only the live conductor/wire through the
core. Ensure link/jumper is in the correct position before switching the power on. The switch contacts are non-polarised.
The solid state switch contacts can only be checked for operation when the switch circuit power is applied.
Under current indication : Belt, fan or pump failure : For normal running the current should be above the set point & the switch contact
closed. If the belt is broken, fan or pump stopped or the electrical supply fails the switch contact will open.
Over current indication : Locked rotor. For normal running the current should be below the setpoint and the switch contact should be
open. When current exceeds the set point the switch contact closes providing indication of current flows above the normal full load amps.
SET POINT
ADJUSTMENT:
76
Factory set to minimum (adjustment fully clockwise) To increase set point, turn monitored load on, (the NO contacts will close) turn the
adjustment counter-clockwise until the switch contacts open as indicated by the status LED or a voltmeter connected to the switch. Then
turn adjustment clockwise until the LED comes back on or voltmeter is seen indicating contacts closed. LED is not fitted on all types.
The adjustment should then be turned slightly clockwise past this point to ensure current fluctuations do not cause false conditions.
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
Current Switches / Sensors
Section 17
CURRENT SENSORS 0-10VDC / 4-20mA
ESOL.. ESLT..
Enclosure Flammability: UL94-V0
These devices are powered by induction from
the monitored AC conductor which passes
through the hole/core. A 0-10vdc or 4-20mA
output signal linear across the range is produced.
They sense the current flow and can thereby monitor
the operation/failure of fans, pumps,
motors etc.
Response Time 500ms
Operating Temperature: -15 to 50°C
Operating Humidity: 0 to 95% non cond.
ESLT..
Can be DIN rail mounted
ESOL.
Type
Description
Output
Powered by
Accuracy
Frequency
Input range (selectable) Max overload current
0-10A,20A,50A
0-200 (fixed range)
0-10A,20A,50A
0-50A,100A,150A
100A
225A
3 x Range
2 x Range
0-20A,40A,60A
0-50A,100A,150A
0-10A,20A or 50A
0-50A,100A,150A
100A
150A
3 x Range
2 x Range
ESOL-651-R1
Solid core
0-10VDC
self powered
+/-2%FS
50/60Hz
ESOL-651-200
Solid core
0-10VDC
self powered
+/-2%FS
50/60Hz
ESOL-675-R1
Solid core
4-20mA
24VDC loop
+/-2%FS
20/400Hz
ESOL-675-R2
Solid core
4-20mA
24VDC loop
+/-2%FS
20/400Hz
ESLT-651-R1
Split core
0-10VDC
self powered
+/-2%FS
50/60Hz
ESLT-651-R2
Split core
0-10VDC
self powered
+/-2%FS
50/60Hz
ESLT-675-R1
Split core
4-20mA
24VDC loop
+/-2%FS
20/400Hz
ESLT-675-R2
Split core
4-20mA
24VDC loop
+/-2%FS
20/400Hz
Select the range according to the conductor current.
If the conductor current is too low ie. 0.5A then loop through the sensor more than once ie. 3 loops = 1.5A and will divide the maximum range by 3.
If the conductor wire is too large, or the current too high it can be wired to the primary side of a current transformer, the secondary side wire is then
passed through the sensor core. Do NOT exceed the voltage or current ratings as this will cause damage to the device.
DIMENSIONS
WIRING:
INSTALLATION:
ESOL..
ESLT..
Set the switch to the required range
Ensure the core is clean at the time of installation as dirt/foreign particles may prevent correct operation.
Ensure ink/jumper is in the correct position before switching the power on.
Pass the live conductor/wire through the core.
OUTPUT 0-10VDC : If the range is 0-10 amps the output will be 0-10vdc linear over 0-10 amps.
OUTPUT 4-20mA: If the range is 0-10 amps the output will be 4-20mA linear over 0-10 amps.
Min cable size 7/0.2mm
Max cable length 100m. Screened cable is highly recommended. Keep away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
The screen should be earthed at controller end only.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
77
FLOW
AIR FLOW SWITCHES
EAA..
Concealed adjustment
Volt free contacts
EAA.. detects air flow in ducts to monitor fan
operation and switches in the event of flow
failure. It is suitable for non-aggressive and
non-combustible clean air/gases.
Max. ambient 70°C
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-V0
Media Contact Parts: Mounting bracket
steel zinc plated, Stainless steel paddle,
Brass rod, Plastic enclosure.
Flow rates are approximate, taken with
the switch mounted in a horizontal duct.
EAA..
Type Min. AdjustmentMax. Adjustment
Max Velocity
Cut-in Cut-out
Cut-in Cut-out
Max Media
Temp°C
230VAC
SPDT
Enclosure
EAA-1
2 m/s 1 m/s
9 m/s 8 m/s
15m/s
80
15(8)A
IP54
EAA-1W
2 m/s 1 m/s
9 m/s 8 m/s
15m/s
80
15(8)A
IP65
DIMENSIONS
55
70
67
89
70
20
100
200
80
WIRING:
1
+F
1
4
4
2
2
ADJUSTING
SCREW
Flow 1-2 close 1-4 open.
No flow 1-4 close 1-2 open.
When the flow is above the cut-in setting 1-2 close. When flow decreases (cut-out) 1-4 close.
Adjustment : Units are pre-set to the approx minimum setting.
Adjusting below this value may result in the switch failing to return.
The switch point is increased by turning the adjusting screw clockwise.
INSTALLATION:
Before installing push the paddle slowly, allow it to return slowly, the switch should operate.
Ensure the arrow on the housing points in the direction of the flow.
Mount away from elbows, bends and other restrictions likely to cause turbulence.
Upstream & downstream of the switch should be straight for at least five times duct diameter.
Do not mount on the side of a horizontal duct as the paddle weight will affect the switching.
The paddle must not touch the duct or be obstructed in any way.
The paddle may be trimmed to increase the switching value.
When the unit is installed in a vertical duct with downward airflow it is
necessary to trim the paddle slightly to compensate for the weight.
78
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
FLOW
Section 18
LIQUID FLOW SWITCHES 15mm/22mm COMPRESSION
ELF..
Concealed adjustment
The ELF-15C & ELF-22C liquid flow switches
are suitable for use in detecting flow in a wide
range of applications ie. hot water, chilled
water, drinking water, diesel oil and up to 30%
glycol systems. They are normally used to
monitor pump operation or switch alarms in
the event of flow failure.
Volt free contacts
Max. ambient 70°C
Max Media Pressure 8 bar
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-V0
Fluids must not contain dissolved or
undissolved particles
ELF-22C
ELF-15C
Type Suitable for
pipe dia.
230VAC
SPDT
Switch Point
Adjustable
Media Contact
Connection
Material
ELF-15C
15mm
15(3)A
1.5 - 3 l/min
Brass, Polypropylene
ELF-22C
22mm
15(3)A
1.5 - 3 l/min
Brass, Polypropylene
Media Temp
°C
Enclosure
15mm Compression
+4/85
IP65
22mm Compression
+4/85
IP65
DIMENSIONS
ELF..
63.5
44.5
14.5
1m Cable
83
Flow
Compression
fitting
Compression
fitting
82.5
15 / 22
15 / 22
To adjust, remove the rubber plug.
Only minor adjustments should be
made if needed.
WIRING:
Brown Wire Black Wire Grey Wire Common
NO Normally Open
NC Normally Closed
Flow : C-NO close
C-NC open
No Flow : C-NC close
C-NO open
INSTALLATION:
1 Ensure the arrow on the housing points in the direction of flow.
2 Mount at any angle from vertical to 30 degrees above the horizontal.
Other positions are not recommended as particles may fall into the
unit and obstruct the rod from moving freely. It is recommended that
a filter is installed upstream of the unit to protect against foreign particles.
3 Mount away from elbows, bends and other restrictions likely to cause turbulence.
4 Upstream-downstream of the switch should be straight for at least 5 x pipe diameter.
Ensure that the pipes / tubes are not pushed too far into the flow switch connections as
this can restrict the paddle from moving freely and affecting the correct switching operation.
5 x
dia
5 x
dia
If adjustment is required, do not over-adjust as this may result in the switch failing to return.
Before installing, push the paddle and allow it to return slowly, the switch should operate.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
79
FLOW
LIQUID FLOW SWITCHES
ELF..
Concealed adjustment
Volt free contacts
Max. ambient 70°C
ELF.. detects liquid flow through chillers,
boilers, pipes and other units to monitor
pump operation or switch alarms in the
event of flow failure ie. hot water, chilled
water, diesel oil and up to 30% glycol
systems. ELF-4../5.. can be used with some
aggressive liquids. Not suitable for salt water.
Max Media Pressure 12 bar
1" 2" 3" paddles included.
Paddles can be cut to suit pipe diameter.
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-V0
ELF-1...5
ELF-7
Type Media
Temp°C 230VAC Operation SPDT
ELF-1C ELF-3 ELF-4 ELF-5 +4/110 +4/110 +4/110 +4/110 15(8)A 15(8)A 15(8)A 15(8)A Normal
Sensitive
Aggressive
Sensitive
Phosphor Bronze/Stainless steel/Brass
Phosphor Bronze/Stainless steel/Brass
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
-30/+110 15(8)A -30/+110 15(8)A -30/+110 15(8)A Sensitive
Aggressive
Sensitive
Normal
ELF-3W ELF-4W ELF-5W ELF-7
+4/110 15(8)A DIMENSIONS
1m³/h = 0.27 l/sec
Media Contact Connection Materials
Suitable for pipe dia.
Enclosure
1" BSPT
1" BSPT
1" BSPT
1" BSPT
1" - 8"
1" - 8"
1" - 8"
1" - 8"
IP54
IP54
IP54
IP54
Phosphor Bronze/Stainless steel/Brass
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
1" BSPT
1" BSPT
1" BSPT
1" - 8"
1" - 8"
1" - 8"
IP65
IP65
IP65
Phosphor Bronze/Stainless steel/Brass
Tee ¾ " x ¾"x 1"
¾" Only
IP54
WIRING:
ELF..
70
100
+F
65
28
1
1
4
4
2
2
Flow:
1-2 close 1-4 open.
No Flow: 1-4 close 1-2 open.
20
1" BSPT
ACCESSORIES:
ELF-15C / ELF-22C with 15/22mm
compression fittings see seperate
data sheet.
ADJUSTING
SCREW
Adjustment : Units are pre-set to the approx. minimum setting.
Adjusting below this value may result in the switch failing to return
To increase switch point, slowly turn adjusting screw CLOCKWISE
EE-6P
EE-PS Set of 1, 2 & 3" paddles for ELF..
6" Paddle for ELF-1,2,3,4,5
INSTALLATION:
Short
Neck
5 x dia
FLOW RATES:
80
5 x dia
1 Before installing, push paddle & allow it to return slowly, the switch should operate.
2 Ensure the arrow on the housing points in the direction of flow.
3 Mount at any angle from vertical to horizontal. Other positions are not recommended
as particles may fall into the unit and obstruct the rod from moving freely.
4 Mount away from elbows, bends and other restrictions likely to cause turbulence.
5 Upstream-downstream of the switch should be straight for at least 5 x pipe diameter.
6 Use a short neck weld socket or short branch tee, DO NOT mount in a long branch.
7 The paddle must not touch the pipe or be obstructed in any way.
8 Remove/trim paddles to suit pipe diameter.
9 EE-6P can be fitted over existing paddles for extra strength in larger pipes.
All Flow rates indicated below are approximate and the readings have been taken with the unit mounted in a horizontal pipe.
A slightly higher flow rate may be required if the unit is mounted in another position to compensate for the weight of the paddle.
Example : ELF-1 pipe dia 2” On min adj. switch makes when flow increases to 3.1 m³/h and breaks when flow decreases to 2.2 m³/h.
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
levels
Section 19
LIQUID LEVEL SWITCHES HORIZONTAL
ELL.. EL..
Volt free contacts
Max. ambient 70°C
To monitor liquid level in tanks and switch
pumps or an alarm in the event of high or low
level. Two switches are required when using
both high and low level or limit and alarm
functions. EL-041 / 093 switches contain
magnets, therefore ensure that no metal
objects are present in the liquid.
Liquid sp. gravity > 0.75
Enclosure Flammability:
ELL.. = UL94-V0
EL.. = Metal
EL-041 / 093
Media :
ELL.. Oil, Diesel, Water,
Non aggressive fluids
EL-041/ 093 Oil, Diesel, Water,
Some aggressive fluids
ELL-01 / 02
Type Mounting
Diff. mm Cut-in Max. Media Temp °C
Max. Media
Press. Bar
230VAC
SPDT
Media Contact
Materials
Enclosure
ELL-01
ELL-02
Horizontal
Horizontal
12
12
90
90
4
4
15(8)A
15(8)A
Brass/Phosphor Bronze/Polypropylene
Brass/Phosphor Bronze/Polypropylene
IP54
IP65
EL-041
EL-093
Horizontal
Horizontal
12
125/550 adj.
330
330
25
25
10(5)A
10(5)A
Stainless steel
Stainless steel
IP65
IP65
DIMENSIONS
ELL-01 / 02
65
70
200
100
28
NOTE:
LEVEL SWITCHES MUST BE MOUNTED
HORIZONTALLY WITH THE ELECTRICAL
ENTRY FACING DOWNWARDS.
1" BSPT
20
EL-041
135
EL-093
135
150
73
120
120
64
120
278 - 561 adj
73
64
DRILLING DETAIL:
64
64
M20
M20
EL-041 DIRECT MOUNTING
EL-MF.. WELDED MATING FLANGE
13
37
M12
92
65
65 CTRS
76 65
Use M12 studs to project 30mm
ACCESSORIES:
WELDED MATING FLANGE for EL-041, 093
WIRING:
EL-MF Carbon Steel
EL-MF/ST Stainless Steel
ELL..
EL..
11
1
1
4
4
2
2
14
12
+L
+L
On level rise contacts 1-4 close
On level fall contacts 1-2 close
1-2 open.
1-4 open.
On level rise contacts 11-14 close 11-12 open.
On level fall contacts 11-12 close 11-14 open.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
81
levels
LIQUID LEVEL SWITCHES HIGH - LOW SWITCHING
EL..
Polypropylene float - PVC cable
These level switches are suitable for mounting
from the top of a tank to monitor the level of
liquid. The float follows the surface of the liquid
level. The switches within the float operate
according to the tilting action.
Volt free contacts
Liquid sp. gravity > 0.7
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-HB
Media : Water, non-combustible and
non-aggressive fluids.
Max pressure 2 bar
EL..
Type Mounting
Difference mm
Approximatly
Media
Temp °C
PVC Cable
Length
Switch Rating
Function
Switch Operation
EL-AL
Vertical 40 0-55 5m 230VAC 6(3)A
Low level alarm
Close on low level & Open on rise
EL-AH
Vertical 40 0-55 5m 230VAC 6(3)A
High level alarm
Close on high level & Open on fall
EL-AHL
Vertical 250/1200 adj.
Dead band
0-55 5m 230VAC 6(3)A
Hi & Lo level alarm
Close on high – Off – Close on low
EL-PF
Vertical 250/1200 adj.
0-55 5m 230VAC 6(3)A
Pump filling
Close on low level until high level
EL-PE
Vertical 250/1200 adj.
0-55 5m 230VAC 6(3)A
Pump emptying
Close on high level until low level
DIMENSIONS
EL..
EL-AHL
EL-PE
ON
Dead band
cable
Low OFF
Low ON
diff. 40mm
approx .
100
*Weight
Adjust cable length
according to the
switching level
required.
** Adj diff
EL-AL
EL-AH
diff. 40mm approx.
Low OFF
Low ON
diff. 40mm approx .
High ON
High OFF
Contacts open on level rise
Contacts close on level fall
Contacts close on level rise
Contacts open on level fall
EL-AHL, EL-PF & EL-PE
Adjustable Weight-Switching Differential
155
Float
cable
1200
A fixing bracket to secure the cable
at the top of the tank is included.
Switching
height
differential
Example 1
Distance of weight from the
bottom of the float 500mm :
Low switching 250mm Approx.
High switching 600mm Approx.
1000
170
*EL-AL & EL-AH do not use a weight.
The switching point can be set by
adjusting the length of cable in the tank.
Example 2
800
Distance of weight from the
bottom of the float 800mm :
Low switching 300mm Approx.
High switching 1200mm Approx.
600
The Maximum switching
differential which can be set
between high and low switching
is approximatly 900mm.
400
**On other types the switching differential
is at minimum when the weight is
nearest to the float.
OFF
ON
EL-093
EL-041
Bracket
200
200
82
OFF
55
Fix the bracket to
the wall/tank,
leaving the float to
hang on the cable.
WIRING:
EL-PF
High ON
High OFF
diff. 40mm
approx.
400
600
EL-AL
1-2 close on low level. When the level increases by about 40mm (diff) the contact opens.
EL-AH
1-2 close on high level. When the level decreases by about 40mm (diff) the contact opens.
EL-AHL
1-2 close on high level. When the level decreases by about 40mm (diff) the contact opens.
1-3 close on low level. When the level increases by about 40mm (diff) the contact opens.
EL-PF
1-2 close on low level until high level
EL-PE
1-2 close on high level until low level
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
800 Distance of the weight from
the bottom of the float
levels
Section 19
LIQUID LEVEL SWITCHES VERTICAL
EL-140 / 141, ETF-1
Volt free contacts
EL-140 / 141
Max. ambient 70°C
To monitor liquid level in tanks and switch
pumps or an alarm in the event of high or low
level. Two switches are required when using
both high and low level or limit and alarm
functions. EL-140 / 141 switches contain
magnets, therefore ensure that no metal
objects are present in the liquid.
Liquid sp. gravity > 0.75
Enclosure Flammability:
EL.. = Metal
ETF.. = UL94-HB
Media :
ETF.. Oil, Diesel, Water,
Non-aggressive fluids
EL-140 / 141 Oil, Diesel, Water,
Some aggressive fluids
ETF-1
EL-MF..
Mounting
Diff. mm Cut-in Max. Media Temp °C
Max. Media
Press. Bar
230VAC
SPDT
Media Contact
Materials
Enclosure
EL-140
Vertical
30/1340 adj.
330
25
10(5)A
Stainless steel
IP65
EL-141
Vertical
30/2340 adj.
330
25
10(5)A
Stainless steel
IP65
ETF-1
Vertical
30/900 adj.
65
5
10(5)A
Nylon/Plastic
IP54
DIMENSIONS
EL-140 / 141
SPECIAL
ORDER
ONLY
Type ETF-1
120
110
135
M20
77
65
Adjustable
Counterweight
3082
150
Switch point adj.
90
50
20
55
EL-141=
73
EL - 140 = 1582
64
weight
adjustable stops
114
123
weight
Adjustable stops
When float reaches upper adj stop C-NC close : When float reaches lower adj stop C-NO close
EL-140/141 - The counter balance/weight on the arm/lever should be adjusted for correct operation.
DRILLING DETAIL:
EL-041 DIRECT MOUNTING
EL-MF.. WELDED MATING FLANGE
13
92
65
37
65 CTRS
ETF-1
M12
34
76 65
84
Use M12 studs to project 30mm
ACCESSORIES:
WELDED MATING FLANGE for EL-041, 141
WIRING:
EL-MF Carbon Steel
EL-MF/ST Stainless Steel
EL..
ETF..
11
2
14
1
12
+L
3
+L
On level rise contacts 11-14 close 11-12 open.
On level fall contacts 11-12 close 11-14 open.
On level rise contacts 1-3 close 1-2 open.
On level fall contacts 1- 2 close 1-3 open.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
83
levels
LIQUID LEVEL TRANSMITTER 4-20mA ULTRASONIC
ELU-8
Accuracy 0.25% of measuring range.
Pressure -0.25 / +2 bar
Used to measure fluid depth or target
distance in tanks or sumps / slurries. The
unit produces a 4-20mA output signal linear
across the desired measuring range.
Suitable for use with BMS systems. The unit
eliminates spurious echoes and ensures a
steady output.
Programmable display : 4 digit concealed
Flange mounting : DN80 PN16,
BS10 TABLE D 3î, ANSI 3î.
Load at 24VDC 250Ω
Ultrasonic cone angle 12°
Materials : UPVC, Polypropylene
The unit is not suitable for use with any
media that has visible fumes.
ELU-8
Type Measuring
Range
Operating Temp °C
ELU-8 0.5 / 8m -10/+60
Span
Resolution
Min
100mm
1mm
Supply
± 15%
Output
2 wire
Max
Power
Protection
24VDC
4-20mA loop
0.5W
IP68
DIMENSIONS
SIDE VIEW
PLAN VIEW
124
C
11
4 slots on
153 PCD
45 to C
84
M20
12
25
C
93
60
192
192
INSTALLATION:
OPEN TANK / SUMP
CLOSED TANK
P
O
O
D
D
A
A
R
B
B
X
X
X
O : Origin of measurement. All measurements (distances / depths) are taken from O.
D : Dead band 500mm.
A : Max media height for signal range. If measurement is required to the top of the tank, mount the transmitter 500mm higher.
P : Protect the unit from sunlight.
B : Beam width 0.21 x Range (R)
X : Beam must not touch any obstacles. Ensure that the beam path is uninterrupted.
Mounting :
OPEN TANK ñ Mount at least 0.5m above the highest media level and 105mm away from walls for every 1m of media depth.
CLOSED TANK ñ Mount at least 0.5m above the highest media level. Do not mount the unit in the centre of the tank to monitor
powder or granules etc. which can form into a cone shape and give inaccurate readings - in this case the unit
should be mounted close to the edge as shown.
Use plastic mounting bolts. Do not over-tighten as this may cause acoustic coupling to the mounting and give false readings.
The transmitter must be mounted on the gasket supplied.
84
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
levels
Section 19
LIQUID LEVEL TRANSMITTER 4-20mA ULTRASONIC
MEASUREMENT :
The unit can be set to read in either Distance or Depth mode.
M : minimum distance between set points must be > 100mm
D : 500mm Dead band O : Start of measurement
O
mA
B
20
DEPTH MODE
M
DISTANCE MODE
4
T
20
INSTALLATION:
4
Distance Mode :
The 4mA point is required to be closer to ‘O’ than the 20mA point
ie O-T = 1m = 4mA O-B = 5m = 20mA
At 2m the unit will give an output of 8mA
Depth Mode :
The 20mA point is required to be closer to ‘O’ than the 4mA point
ie O-T = 1m = 20mA O-B = 5m = 4mA
At 2m the unit will give an output of 16mA
Press the following keys in sequence M
. The display now shows ‘Ent’
1. Scaling Choose either Manual or Automatic scaling.
Manual Achieved by taking measurement from O to target distance for the 4mA & 20mA points.
Press E to display current setting. To change, press E again & use the
keys to set the distance (m) for the 4mA
. Unit now displays current 20mA
setting. Press E to confirm setting - unit displays ‘donE’ & then the new setting. Press
setting. To change, press E & use the
keys to set the distance (m) for the 20mA setting. Press E to confirm the setting.
The unit displays ‘donE’ and then the new setting. Press M twice to enter run mode.
Automatic : Achieved by adjusting physical tank contents to the the 4mA & 20mA points
. The unit displays ‘Auto’. Press E once and the display will show the 4mA distance of media from the
Press
sensor. Press E to store the value. Press E to confirm. Unit displays ‘donE’ and then displays the current setting.
. Unit displays the 20mA distance of media from the sensor. Press E to store the value. Press E to confirm.
Press
Unit displays ‘donE’ and then displays the current setting. Press M twice to enter run mode.
2. Display Selection:
. Unit displays ‘Ent’ Press
. The unit now displays ‘disP’. Press E.
Press keys in sequence M
keys to display depth above 4mA point or distance above 20mA point in metres.
To display depth/distance in metres : Use the
Press E to confirm the setting. Unit displays ‘donE’. Press M twice to enter run mode.
keys to display depth above 4mA point or distance above 20mA point in
To display depth/distance as % of range. Use the
. The unit now displays ‘PerC’. Press E to confirm the setting The unit displays ‘donE’ Press M twice to enter run
metres. Press
mode.
3. Lost Echo Response:
This occurs if the unit fails to receive ‘good’ echoes. When normal conditions resume, so do output & display.
keys to select the ‘lost echo’ output required :Press keys in sequence M
. Unit displays ‘LE’. Press E. then
Select ‘20mA’ : drive to 20mA OR ‘4mA’ : drive to 4mA OR ‘21mA’ : drive to 21mA OR ‘hold’ : holds last ’good’ reading.
Press E to confirm setting. The unit displays ‘donE’
Press M twice to enter run mode.
Detail showing keypad and display located under the transmitter cover
WIRING:
M
E
+_
M E
- BLUE
RED
+
4 - 20mA
Terminals 0.5-1.5mm²
Sensor / control signal cable size 7/0.2mm Max length 300m
Screened cable is recommended The screen should be earthed at controller end only
Keep sensor/control signal wires away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
TROUBL E
SHOOTING :
1. Unit gives ‘Lost Echo’ reading ‘LE’ Target is out of range or media is too dusty/steamy or excessive foam on liquid
surface. Check tank conditions and/or re-site transmitter.
2. Reading not changing with level. Obstruction interfering with echo ie agitator blade or tank wall.
Re-site transmitter away from obstructions.
3. Reading erratic. Media unsteady or within dead band. Electrical noise interference.
Re-site transmitter ensuring media is 500mm away. Check wiring.
4. Reading occasionally high when tank not full. Close range echo being detected. Acoustic coupling to mounting bracket.
Re-site transmitter. Fit foam gasket and loosen mounting bolts.
5. No Display / Loop current. Power failure.
6. Display reads “ ¯ ¯ ¯ ¯” or “_ _ _ _ “ Media over or under range ie outside the 4-20mA setpoints. Reset the unit.
7. Display reads “Err” 4mA & 20mA setpoints are within 100mm of each other. Reset the unit.
Check power supply.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
85
PRESSURE
AIR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES
EDA.. EFS..
Adjustment under cover
EDA..W
Volt free contacts
Enclosure:
EDA.. : Glass filled polycarbonate
EFS.. : Steel zinc plated
To monitor air flow, dirty filters, flue
draught, frost on coils & level. For
positive, negative, vacuum &
differential pressure. Suitable for
non-corrosive, non-combustible
air/gases.
EFS-02HT - High Temperature model includes 2 x Brass Duct Adaptors for 6mm OD metal tube.
Ensure that the pressure line is at least 1m long.
Conversion: 1 mbar = 100 Pa
Max. ambient 70°C
Enclosure Flammability:
EDA.. = UL94-V0
W = UL94-V2
EDA..
EFS..
Type Range
mb
Diff mbar
approx
Max Press.
mbar
230VAC
SPDT
Media
Temp °C
Diaphragm
Material
Pressure
Connections
Enclosure
EDA-22 EDA-33 EDA-44 EDA-55 0.2/3
0.5/5
1/10
5/20
0.1/0.4
0.2/0.7
0.3/1
0.5/2
50
50
50
50
1(0.5)A
1(0.5)A
1(0.5)A
1(0.5)A
-20/+85
-20/+85
-20/+85
-20/+85
Silicone
Silicone
Silicone
Silicone
6mm push-on
6mm push-on
6mm push-on
6mm push-on
IP54
IP54
IP54
IP54
EDA-22/IP65 EDA-33/IP65 EDA-44/IP65 EDA-55/IP65 0.2/3
0.5/5
1/10
5/20
0.1/0.4
0.2/0.7
0.3/1
0.5/2
50
50
50
50
1(0.5)A
1(0.5)A
1(0.5)A
1(0.5)A
-20/+85
-20/+85
-20/+85
-20/+85
Silicone
Silicone
Silicone
Silicone
6mm push-on
6mm push-on
6mm push-on
6mm push-on
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
EDA-22W EDA-33W EDA-44W EDA-55W 0.2/3
0.5/5
1/10
5/20
0.1/0.4
0.2/0.7
0.3/1
0.5/2
50
50
50
50
1(0.5)A
1(0.5)A
1(0.5)A
1(0.5)A
-20/+85
-20/+85
-20/+85
-20/+85
Silicone
Silicone
Silicone
Silicone
6mm push-on
6mm push-on
6mm push-on
6mm push-on
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
0.13/30
0.13/30
0.05/2
0.05/2
35
35
10(2)A
10(2)A
80
>80
6mm comp
6mm comp
IP30
IP30
EFS-02 EFS-02HT* * includes 2x EE-BFN and 2x 2m long 10mm copper tube
EDA..
DIMENSIONS
EFS..
98
83
88
82
2
PG11
0.5
5.0
Nitrile
Nitrile
1
80.8
2.0
3.5
159
3
5
6.2
P1
40
20
P2
58.3
LO HI
ACCESSORIES:
EE-PH
EE-BFN
EE-BFN Brass duct flange for 6mm OD metal tube
EE-CT6 Copper tube 6mm OD x 10m for EFS..
EE-D1 Duct kit 2m EE-PH + 2xEE-PT for EFS-02
EE-D2 Duct kit 2m EE-PH + 2xEE-PT for EDA..
EE-PH15PVC hose 5x8mm. x 15 metres
EE-PT 70mm Plastic duct adaptor for use with PVC hose
EE-TE Plastic T connector for use with PVC hose
EE-TA Plastic straight connector for use with PVC hose
EE-TY Plastic Y connector for use with PVC hose
EE-PT
EE-TA
EDA..
WIRING:
EE-D1 EE-D2
EE-TY
EE-TE
EFS..
C
3
2
NO
+P
+P
1
On pressure rise to scale setting (range) contacts 1
On pressure fall (diff.) contacts 1-2 (C-NC) close.
INSTALLATION:
86
NC
INCREASE
ADJUSTING
SCREW
-3 (C-NO) close.
Port + P1 HI = High Pressure .. connect to fan discharge or high pressure side of filter.
Port − P2 LO = Low Pressure .. connect to fan suction or low pressure side of filter.
The LP Port can be left open for fan/air flow monitoring.
To monitor vacuum - connect the low pressure port to high vacuum side.
Mount vertically as shown. Units can be mounted in other positions but may need a slightly higher pressure to operate.
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
PRESSURE
Section 20
PRESSURE SWITCHES GAS - AIR - LIQUID
EPG..
Volt free contacts
A filter fitted before the switch is highly recommended.
Suitable to monitor the pressure of
water, gas, air or oil and switch in
the event of high or low pressure
conditions. Two switches must be
used if both high and low
pressures are to be monitored.
Adjustment under the cover
The pressure line can be formed into a U shape/syphon
for media temperatures up to 300°C.
Not suitable for dirty, heavy or aggressive fluids.
Ambient -20/+85 °C
mbar x 100 = Pa
Enclosure: Zinc diecast with glass filled nylon lid
All settings/differentials are approximately +/-2% due
to mechanical tolerances.
EPG..
Type Range
mbar
Diff
mbar
Max Press
mbar
230VAC
SPDT
Max Media
Temp °C
Pressure
Connections
Enclosure
EPG-125
5/125
2.5
500
5(2)A
Brass
Beryllium Copper
Nitrile Rubber
85
¼" BSP Male
IP65
EPG-250
15/250
4
500
5(2)A
Brass
Beryllium Copper
Nitrile Rubber
85
¼" BSP Male
IP65
DIMENSIONS
Media Contact
Materials
EPG..
106
44
M20
Conduit
Entry
105
¼" BSP Male
WIRING:
76.2
EPG..
Earth
Adjustment - Turn the nut slowly anti-clockwise
to increase the setting. Do not over adjust.
Common
Normally Open
Normally Closed
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
87
PRESSURE
LIQUID PRESSURE SWITCHES
EP..
* The minimum differential will
gradually increase by approx 60%
as the switch setting is increased.
Suitable to monitor static or positive pressure
of water, air, oil, diesel, steam** etc & switch in
the event of high or low pressure conditions.
Two switches must be used if both high and low
pressures are to be controlled.
Max. media temp. 80°C
**The pressure line can be formed into a
U shape/syphon for media temperatures
up to 300°C.
EP..M / ML
Tamper proof adjustment
Volt free contacts
Max. ambient 70°C
EP-2..32
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-V2
EP-003 / 008
Type Range
Bar
Diff
Bar
Max Press. Bar
230VAC
SPDT
Media Contact
Materials EP-2 EP-4 EP-8 EP-16
0.1/2 0.2/4 0.5/8 1/16 * 0.07/1.9 * 0.15/3.7
* 0.3/7.5
* 0.6/15
40
40
40
48
16(6)A
16(6)A
16(6)A
16(6)A
Cast Aluminium/Nitrile
Cast Aluminium/Nitrile
Cast Aluminium/Nitrile
Cast Aluminium/Nitrile
½" BSP Female
½" BSP Female
½" BSP Female
½" BSP Female
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
EP-4M
EP-4ML
0.2/4 0.2/4 40
40
16(6)A
16(6)A
Cast Aluminium/Nitrile
Cast Aluminium/Nitrile
½" BSP Female
½" BSP Female
IP65
IP65
EP-003
EP-008
0.3/3
0.5/8
12
12
24(10)A
24(10)A
Brass Tin Plated/Phosphor Bronze
Brass Tin Plated/Phosphor Bronze
¼" BSP Male
¼" BSP Male
IP40
IP40
hand reset open high
hand reset open low
0.25/2
0.5/5
Pressure
Connections
Enclosure
DIMENSIONS
EP-2..32
EP-003 / 008
103
85
67
77.5
40
30
75.5
75
22.5
22.5
20
40
50
WIRING:
20
1/4" BSP Male
1/2" BSP Female
EP-2..32
1
EP-003 / 008
4
2
1
+P
2
4
+P
EP.. EP..M EP..ML SETTING:
On pressure rise to scale setting (range) 1-4 close Open high = Contacts 1-2 open on pressure rise Open low = Contacts 1-4 open on pressure fall EP-2..32
EP-003 / 008
5
4
3
2
1
BAR
88
-0,75
0
1
2
3
bar
Cut in
20
0
20
40
2
1,5
1
0,5
PSIG bar
25
15
5
PSI
minus Diff.
is Cut out
.. On pressure fall (diff) contacts 1-2 close.
.. Pressure must fall to allow resetting.
.. Pressure must rise to allow resetting.
EP-2..32 : Set the RED arrow FIRST to the High switch point,
then set the GREEN arrow to the Low switch point.
The differential is RED minus GREEN setting.
EP-003 / 008 : Set the RANGE FIRST to the High switch point ,
then set the DIFF to the Low switch point,
the differential is RANGE minus DIFF setting.
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
PRESSURE
Section 20
LIQUID DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES
EP..
Max. media temp. 80°C
These units can be used to monitor the flow of
liquids across pumps, boilers, chillers, valves
etc. They can also be used to monitor dirty
filter conditions. Suitable for water, air, oil,
diesel and up to 30% glycol etc.
Type EP-099/100/101 are suitable for low
pressure applications ie below 0.4 bar.
If the low pressure port is left open,
these switches can then be used as
normal standard pressure switches.
Volt free contacts
Max. ambient 70°C
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-V1
EP-113
Type Range
Diff
EP-100
Max Press
Press. Bar
230VAC
SPDT
Media Contact
Materials
Pressure
Connections
bar
12
5(2)A
Brass/Phosphor Bronze
Enclosure
EP-113 0.2/4
EP-114W EP-115W
0.07/1 bar 0.2/4 bar
0.05 bar
0.1 bar
34
34
5(3)A
5(3)A
Copper / Nitrile / Brass⅛" BSP Female
Copper / Nitrile / Brass⅛" BSP Female
IP65
IP65
EP-099
EP-100
EP-101
8/125 mbar
15/250 mbar
25/400 mbar
6
7
10
14
34
34
5(3)A
5(3)A
5(3)A
Copper / Nitrile / Brass⅛" BSP Female
Copper / Nitrile / Brass⅛" BSP Female
Copper / Nitrile / Brass⅛" BSP Female
IP65
IP65
IP65
bar 0.1
mbar
mbar
mbar
¼" BSP Female
IP40
SELECT A SWITCH WHICH CAN BE SET WELL BELOW THE SYSTEM DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE.
For flow failure applications it is important to have a close switching differential as in our EP.. range.
Switches with a larger differential are generally unsuitable for this application.
DIMENSIONS
EP-113
EP-114W / EP-115W / EP-099 / EP-100 / EP-101
C
128
63
ADJ
NUT
M20
LP
B
LP
175
HP
D
HP
20
EP-114W / EP-115W
EP-099 / EP-100 / EP-101
40
Mounting at any angle is possible.
HP = High Pressure bottom port
A
106
106
B
125
125
C
86
96
D
51
51
LP = Low Pressure top port
EE-CT6
ACCESSORIES:
EE-MC
EE-CT6 Copper tube 6mm OD x 10m for Pressure Switches and Transmitters
EE-MC1 Brass Male Compression fitting for 6mm OD tube x ⅛" BSP Brass Male
Compression fitting for 6mm OD tube x ¼" BSP Male
WIRING:
EP-113 / EP-113/ST
1
4
2
EP-114W / EP-115W / EP-099 / EP-100 / EP-101
NC 2
4 NO
+P
1 C
+P
On pressure rise to scale setting
(range) contacts 1-4 close
Pressure fall (diff) contacts 1-2 close
On pressure rise to scale setting
(range) contacts 1-4 close
Pressure fall (diff) contacts 1-2 close
ADJUSTMENT:
EP-113.. OTHER MODELS: Remove cover & with a screwdriver, turn the slotted wheel above the scale to the left to increase the setting.
The adjusting nut is under the cover - Turn it slowly anti-clockwise to increase setting. Do NOT over-adjust.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
89
PRESSURE
AIR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS 0-10 VDC / 4-20mA
EDT..
These devices measure vacuum,
pressure or differential pressure of air
and non-combustible, non-aggressive
gases across fans, filters, air flow devices
etc and give a 0-10vdc output signal
linear across the range. Suitable for air
conditioning, ventilation and building
management systems.
Models with square root extracted
output are available on request.
The duct kit EE-D2 is included.
EDT..
Type
Range
mb
Max
press mb
EDT+-0.3/0.5/1
+-0-0.3/0-0.5/0-1 selectable
EDT-1/3/5
Accuracy <1%
Max ambient
70°C
Consumption at 0-10VDC
10mA
nom pressure
4-20mA
20mA
Load
0-10VDC
10KΩ
4-20mA at 24VDC 0.8KΩ
Response time
<20ms
Media contact materials
Ceramic/Silicon
Max media temp
70°C
Max pressure one side
< 3mb
50mb
> 3mb
100mb
Enclosure polycarbonate
lid
UL94-HB
hsngUL94-V2
1 mbar = 100Pa
EDT..V
Supply
+/- 15%
Output
Signal
Pressure
Connections
Enclosure
50
24VAC/DC
0-10VDC
6.2mm Push on
IP65
0-1/0-3/0-5 selectable
50
24VAC/DC
0-10VDC
6.2mm Push on
IP65
EDT-10/16/25
0-10/0-16/0-25 selectable
100
24VAC/DC
0-10VDC
6.2mm Push on
IP65
EDT-…MA
EDT-…V
As above but 2 wire loop powered 4-20mA output
as above but with digital display
Other variants on request
DIMENSIONS
92
EDT..
SETTING RANGES
80
EDT-selectable
49
1
0
Pressure range
75
Cable entry
PG11
HP
6.2
+
P1
High
0
0
Medium
0
1
Low
1
0
For the EDT..V follow the instructions inside the lid
LP
P2
EE-PH
ACCESSORIES:
EE-BFN
EE-D2
EE-BFN Brass duct flange for 6mm OD metal tube
EE-D2 Duct kit 2m EE-PH + 2xEE-PT for EDA..
EE-PH15PVC hose 5x8mm x 15 metres
EE-PT 70mm Plastic duct adaptor for use with PVC hose
EE-TE Plastic T connector for use with PVC hose
EE-TA Plastic straight connector for use with PVC hose
EE-TY Plastic Y connector for use with PVC hose
EE-TA
WIRING:
EDT..MA
EDT..
2 wire
EE-TY
EE-TE
Use minimum cable size of 7/0.2mm
Max cable length 100m / 0-10vdc 300m / 4-20mA
Screened cable is recommended.
The screen should be earthed at controller end only.
Keep away from power cables/units which may
cause Interference.
3 wire
Mount vertically as shown.
INSTALLATION:
Mounting with lid facing down will increase the reading by approx. 0.1mbar.
Mounting with lid facing up will decrease the reading by approx. 0.1mbar.
Always press the reset button after installation to zero these errors.
Port P1 + = High Pressure .. connect to fan discharge or high pressure side of filter.
Port P2 - = Low Pressure .. connect to fan suction or low pressure side of filter.
+
P1
90
EE-PT
The low pressure port can be left open for fan/air flow monitoring
To monitor vacuum - connect the low pressure port to the high vacuum side.
P2
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
PRESSURE
Section 20
LIQUID PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS 0-10 VDC / 4-20mA
EWT..
Accuracy<0.5%
Max ambient85°C
Consumption at nom pressure
0-10VDC7mA
4-20mA23mA
Load0-10VDC10KΩ
4-20mA at 24VDC 0.85KΩ
Response time<10ms
1 mbar = 100Pa
These units can be used to measure
static or positive pressure changes of
water, air, oil, refrigerants, steam or
other non-combustible fluids and give
a 0-10vdc / 4-20mA output signal
linear across the pressure range.
Suitable for heating, air conditioning
and building management systems.
EWT..
Range
Bar
Max Press.
Bar
Supply
± 10%
Output
Signal
Max Media
Temp °C
EWT- 006
EWT- 01.6
EWT- 02.5
0/0.6
0/1.6
0/2.5
1.8
4.8
7.5
24VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
0-10 vdc
0-10 vdc
0-10 vdc
EWT- 4
EWT- 6
EWT- 10
EWT- 16
EWT- 25
EWT- 40
0/4
0/6
0/10
0/16
0/25
0/40
12
12
20
32
50
80
24VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
EWT- 01.6/DMA
EWT- 02.5/DMA
EWT- 4/DMA
EWT- 6/DMA
EWT- 10/DMA
EWT- 16/DMA
EWT- 25/DMA
0/1.6
0/2.5
0/4
0/6
0/10
0/16
0/25
4.8
7.5
12
12
20
32
50
24VDC
24VDC
24VDC
24VDC
24VDC
24VDC
24VDC
DIMENSIONS
Media Contact
Materials
Pressure
Connections
Enclosure
-20/+100
-20/+100
-20/+100
¼"BSP Male
¼"BSP Male
¼"BSP Male
IP65
IP65
IP65
0-10 vdc
0-10 vdc
0-10 vdc
0-10 vdc
0-10 vdc
0-10 vdc
-20/+100
-20/+100
-20/+100
-20/+100
-20/+100
-20/+100
¼"BSP Male
¼"BSP Male
¼"BSP Male
¼"BSP Male
¼"BSP Male
¼"BSP Male
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
4-20 mA loop
4-20 mA loop
4-20 mA loop
4-20 mA loop
4-20 mA loop
4-20 mA loop
4-20 mA loop
-20/+100
-20/+100
-20/+100
-20/+100
-20/+100
-20/+100
-20/+100
¼"BSP Male
¼"BSP Male
¼"BSP Male
¼"BSP Male
¼"BSP Male
¼"BSP Male
¼"BSP Male
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
Ceramic/Stainless Steel/Epdm
Type
EWT..
Connector DIN EN
175301-803-A
¼ BSP
Mounting at any angle is possible.
WIRING:
EWT..
EWT../DMA
Min sensor / control signal cable size 7/0.2mm
Max length 100m.
The screen should be earthed at controller end only.
Keep sensor/control signal wires away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
Screened cable is recommended.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
91
PRESSURE
LIQUID DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS 0-10 VDC / 4-20mA
EWDT..
Accuracy
up to 2.5 bar
1.25%
up to 4 bar
0.75%
up to10bar0.5%
Max ambient85°C
Consumption at nom press
20mA
Load0-10VDC10KΩ
4-20mA at 24VDC 0.65KΩ
Response time<10ms
System pressure
up to 6bar
25bar
>10bar50bar
1mbar = 100Pa
EWDT..
Type
Range
Max *
Press.
Supply
± 10%
Output
Signal
Max Media
Temp °C
EWDT-001
EWDT-002
EWDT-025
0/100mbar
0/200mbar
0/250mbar
0.6 Bar
1.2 Bar
1.2 Bar
24VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
0-10 vdc
0-10 vdc
0-10 vdc
-15/+80*
-15/+80*
-15/+80*
EWDT-004
0/400mbar
EWDT-005
0/500mbar
EWDT-006
0/600mbar
EWDT-1
0/1bar
EWDT-1.6
0/1.6bar
EWDT-2.5
0/2.5bar
EWDT-4
0/4bar
EWDT-6
0/6bar
EWDT-10
0/10bar
* Tolerable overload one side
2 Bar
3 Bar
3 Bar
5 Bar
12 Bar
12 Bar
12 Bar
12 Bar
20 Bar
24VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
0-10 vdc
0-10 vdc
0-10 vdc
0-10 vdc
0-10 vdc
0-10 vdc
0-10 vdc
0-10 vdc
0-10 vdc
-15/+80*
-15/+80*
-15/+80*
-15/+80*
-15/+80*
-15/+80*
-15/+80*
-15/+80*
-15/+80*
Media Contact
Materials
Ceramic/Stainless Steel/Epdm
These units can be used to
mesure pressure or differential
pressure of water, up to 30%
glycol or other neutral fluids across
pumps, boilers, chillers, valves
etc. The 0-10vdc output signal is
linear across the range. Suitable
for heating, air conditioning and
building management systems.
For liquid levels 1m depth of
water = 100mbar
Pressure
Connections
Enclosure
6mm Compression
6mm Compression
6mm Compression
IP65
IP65
IP65
6mm Compression
6mm Compression
6mm Compression
6mm Compression
6mm Compression
6mm Compression
6mm Compression
6mm Compression
6mm Compression
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
IP65
Other variants on request
OPTIONAL:
EWDT..MA
4-20m output 2 wire loop
EWDT..
DIMENSIONS
Stainless steel
Female connector DIN EN
175301-803-A
Stainless steel ~136 / PVDF ~130 (mounted)
EE-CT6
ACCESSORIES:
EE-MC
EE-CT6 Copper tube 6mm OD x 10m for Pressure Switches and Transmitters
EE-MC1 Brass Male Compression fitting for 6mm OD tube x ⅛" BSP Male
EE-MC2 Brass Male Compression fitting for 6mm OD tube x ¼" BSP Male
WIRING:
EWDT..
Min sensor / control signal cable size 7/0.2mm
Screened cable is recommended.
Max cable length 100m.
92
EWDT..MA
Keep away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
The screen should be earthed at controller end only.
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
Damper Actuators / Valve Motors
Section 21
DAMPER / VALVE MOTORS 4Nm 2 & 3 POINT
EK4..
The motor stops automatically when
the end positions are reached.
Up to 5 motors can be wired in parallel.
These small motors can be fitted directly onto
air damper shafts as used in HVAC systems.
They are also suitable for use on control
valves. The rotary action can be used to open
& close dampers, valves etc.
Max. ambient -20/+50°C
Max angle of rotation 90°
Adj. angle of rotation limiter 0-30° & 90-60°
Reversible position indication 0-10, 10-0
Noise level 40dB
Manual Override
Supply : 24VAC±15%
EK4..
230VAC±10%
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-V0
Type Supply
Operation
50/60Hz
Aux Switch
230VAC SPDT
Run Time
Torque
Approx
Damper Area
Approx
Consumption
VA
Enclosure
EK4-24
EK4-24S
24VAC/DC 24VAC/DC 2 & 3 Point 2 & 3 Point --
2 x 3(1.5)A
35s
35s
4Nm
4Nm
1m²
1m²
4.1
4.1
IP44
IP44
EK4-230
EK4-230S
230VAC 230VAC 3 Point ONLY
3 Point ONLY
--
2 x 3(1.5)A
35s
35s
4Nm
4Nm
1m²
1m²
5
5
IP44
IP44
DIMENSIONS
Anti-Rotation Bracket
DIRECT MOUNTING : Shaft size - Round 6 -16mm
26
165.5
2 x M16
150
1 off M16 male to
M20 female conduit
adapter included.
2 off with Aux
switch models.
85
65
45
Manual
Pushbutton
41.25
WIRING:
24VAC/DC - 2 & 3 Point Control
230VAC - 3 Point Control ONLY
1
_
2
2 POINT CONTROL
Clockwise 1 Neutral
Anti-clockwise 1 Neutral
3 point
Control
2 point
Control
3
1
_
+
N
24VAC/DC
ONLY
2
3
+
L
+
L
Auxiliary Switches
Factory setting
10
80
2 Live
2 + 3 Live
FLOATING / 3 POINT CONTROL
Clockwise 1 Neutral 2 Live
Anti-clockwise 1 Neutral 2 open
3 open
3 Live
Example:
Motor anti-clockwise
21-22 closed at 10° and below.
21
22
23
24
25
26
Motor clockwise
24-25 closed at 80° and above.
24VAC/DC
230 VAC
NO BACK VOLTAGE FROM SUPPLY TERMINALS.
MOTOR STARTS AUTOMATICALLY AFTER MANUAL ADJUSTMENT.
SETTING:
2 x Auxiliary switches Adjustable 0-90°
c
Manually set the motor to the required switching
point & rotate the cam wheel just over the
microswitch button. Set the second switching
point by repeating this using the
second cam wheel.
3 2 1
90-0
0-90
aux
switches
b
24 25 26
21 22 23
a
90-0
adj angle of
rotation 0-30
at both ends
0-90
Direction of Rotation
The direction of rotation is changed
by reversing the plug.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
93
Damper Actuators / Valve Motors
DAMPER / VALVE MOTORS 4Nm MODULATING
EK4-24M
The motor stops automatically when the end
positions are reached.
Up to 5 motors can be wired in parallel.
These small motors can be fitted
directly onto air damper shafts as used
in HVAC systems. They are also
suitable for use on control valves. The
rotary operation modulates according to the
0-10vdc signal in order to open and close
dampers, valves etc.
Max. ambient -20/+50°C
Max angle of rotation 90°
Adjustable angle of rotation limiter 0-30° & 90-60°
Reversible position indication 0-10, 10-0
Noise level 40dB
Manual Override
Supply : 24VAC/DC±15%
EK4-24M
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-V0
Type EK4-24M
DIMENSIONS
Supply
Input
50/60Hz
24VAC/DC 0-10vdc
Run Time
Torque
Approx
35s
Damper Area
Approx
Consumption
VA
Enclosure
1m²
3.5
IP44
4Nm
Anti-Rotation Bracket
DIRECT MOUNTING : Shaft size - Round 6 -16mm
EK4-24M
WIRING:
INPUT RESISTANCE
Y1 > 100KΩ
LOAD RESISTANCE U > 50KΩ
ON POWER CUT THE MOTOR STOPS.
IF THE INPUT SIGNAL IS CUT, THE MOTOR RETURNS TO 0VDC POSITION
Terminals 0.5-2.5mm²
Min sensor cable size 7/0.2mm
Max length 100m.
Screened cable is recommended.
The screen should be earthed at controller end only
Keep sensor wires away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
SETTING:
Direction of Rotation
ACCESSORIES:
PAF Digital Positioner
0-100%
Wall Mounting
Angle of Rotation
Dimensions (mm)
20
84
Supply24VAC/DC
60
106
84
Output0-10VDC
(0-100%)
Steps1%
Output 0-10vdc or 2-10vdc selectable
94
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
Damper Actuators / Valve Motors
Section 21
DAMPER / VALVE MOTORS 2 & 3 POINT
E08.. E16.. E24.. E32..
Up to 10 motors can be wired in parallel.
Max. ambient -20/+50°C
The motor stops automatically when the
end positions are reached.
Angle of rotation 0-90° adjustable
Reversible position indication 0-10, 10-0
Noise level 45dB Manual Override
Supply : 24VAC ±20% 24VDC ±10% 230VAC ±10%
24V=6.5VA 230V=6VA
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-V0
*FOR WEATHERPROOF ENCLOSURES SEE
SEPARATE DATA SHEET.
E08.. E16.. E24.. E32..
Type Supply
Operation
50/60Hz
Aux Switch
230VAC
Run Time
Torque
Approx
Damper Area
Approx
Enclosure
E08-24
E08-24S
E08-230
E08-230S
24VAC/DC 24VAC/DC 230VAC 230VAC 2 & 3 Point
2 & 3 Point
2 & 3 Point
2 & 3 Point
–
2 x 3(1.5)A
–
2 x 3(1.5)A
30s
30s
30s
30s
8Nm
8Nm
8Nm
8Nm
2m
2m
2m
2m
IP44
IP44
IP44
IP44
E16-24
E16-24S
E16-230
E16-230S
24VAC/DC 24VAC/DC 230VAC 230VAC 2 & 3 Point
2 & 3 Point
2 & 3 Point
2 & 3 Point
–
2 x 3(1.5)A
–
2 x 3(1.5)A
80s
80s
80s
80s
16Nm
16Nm
16Nm
16Nm
4m
4m
4m
4m
IP44
IP44
IP44
IP44
E24-24
E24-24S
E24-230
E24-230S
24VAC/DC 24VAC/DC 230VAC 230VAC 2 & 3 Point
2 & 3 Point
2 & 3 Point
2 & 3 Point
–
2 x 3(1.5)A
–
2 x 3(1.5)A
125s
125s
125s
125s
24Nm
24Nm
24Nm
24Nm
6m
6m
6m
6m
IP44
IP44
IP44
IP44
E32-24
E32-24S
E32-230
E32-230S
24VAC/DC 24VAC/DC 230VAC 230VAC 2 & 3 Point
2 & 3 Point
2 & 3 Point
2 & 3 Point
–
2 x 3(1.5)A
–
2 x 3(1.5)A
140s
140s
140s
140s
32Nm
32Nm
32Nm
32Nm
8m
8m
8m
8m
IP44
IP44
IP44
IP44
DIMENSIONS
Anti-Rotation Bracket
SPECIAL ORDER
ONLY
These motors can be fitted directly on
to air damper shafts or remotely using
linkage accessories in HVAC
systems. They are also suitable for
use on control valves. The rotary
operation can be used to open and
close dampers, valves etc.
DIRECT MOUNTING : Shaft size - Round 10-20mm Square 10-16mm
2 x M16
Manual
Pushbutton
180
67
100
45
180
ZKH
ACCESSORIES:
ZKA
ZKG
100
100
1 off M16 male to
M20 female conduit
adapter included.
2 off with Aux
switch models.
REMOTE MOUNTING
M8 THREADED ROD
NOT SUPPLIED
M8
Motor Crank Arm
Damper Crank Arm
24 / 230 V
WIRING:
2 point
Control
1
Auxiliary Switches
3 point
Control
2
3
1
+
L
24VAC
230 VAC
N
2
3
_
+
L
+
L
22
23
24
Adjustable 0-90 °
REQUIRES : 2 x ZKG
1 x ZKH
1 x ZKA
Direction of Rotation
Adj angle of rotation between 0-90 °°
The direction of rotation is
changed by reversing the
polarity of the motor plug.
Rotation angle is adjusted by repositioning the
adapter in 5 steps.The adaptor is released by
pressing the locking clip on the underside of
the actuator.
25
Example:
Motor anti-clockwise
21-22 closed at 10° and below
Motor clockwise
21-24 closed at 80° and above
2 x Auxiliary switches
Ball Joint
Factory setting
10
80
21
_
N
M8
Manually set the motor to the required switching point & rotate
the cam wheel just over the microswitch button. To set the
second switching point repeat this using the second cam wheel.
Latchable manual override.
No back voltage from supply terminals.
Auto re-start (230V motors) after manual adj.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
95
Damper Actuators / Valve Motors
DAMPER / VALVE MOTORS 0-10VDC / 4-20mA
E08..M, E16..M, E24..M, E32..M
Motor stops automatically when in the end position.
Up to 5 motors can be wired in parallel.
Max. ambient -20/+50°C
These motors can be fitted directly onto
air damper shafts or remotely using
linkage accessories in HVAC systems.
They are also suitable for use on control
valves. The rotary operation modulates
according to the 0-10vdc / 4-20mA
signal in order to open and close
dampers, valves etc.
Adjustable angle of rotation limiter 0-90°
Reversible position indication 0-10, 10-0
Noise level 45dB
Enclosure Flammability = UL94-V0
Supply
Selectable Input
50/60Hz
E08-24M
E08-24MS
Run Time
Torque
Approx
Damper Area
Approx
Enclosure
0-10vdc/4-20mA
0-10vdc/4-20mA
–
2 x 3(1.5)A
30s
30s
8Nm
8Nm
2m²
2m²
IP44
IP44
0-10vdc/4-20mA
0-10vdc/4-20mA
0-10vdc/
0-10vdc/
–
2 x 3(1.5)A
–
–
80s
80s
80s
80s
16Nm
16Nm
16Nm
16Nm
4m²
4m²
4m²
4m²
IP44
IP44
IP44
IP44
E24-24M24VAC/DC 0-10vdc/4-20mA
E24-24MS
24VAC/DC
0-10vdc/4-20mA
–
2 x 3(1.5)A
125s 24Nm 6m² IP44
125s
24Nm
6m²
IP44
E32-24M24VAC/DC 0-10vdc/4-20mA
–
140s 32Nm 8m² IP44
24VAC/DC 24VAC/DC Aux Switch
230VAC
E16-24M
24VAC/DC E16-24MS
24VAC/DC E16-230M230VAC
E16-230MS230VAC
DIMENSIONS
Anti-Rotation Bracket
DIRECT MOUNTING :
Shaft size - Round 10-20mm Square 10-16mm
ACCESSORIES:
ZKH
Motor Crank Arm
ZKA
Damper Crank Arm
ZKG
Ball Joint
REQUIRES : 2 x ZKG
PAF Digital Positioner 0-100% Wall Mounting
96
REMOTE MOUNTING
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
1 x ZKH
1 x ZKA
SPECIAL
ORDER
ONLY
*FOR WEATHERPROOF ENCLOSURES SE
SEPERATE DATA SHEET.
E08..M E16..M E24..M E32..M
Type Latchable Manual Override
Supply : 24VAC ±20% 24VDC ±10% 230VAC ±10%
24V=7.5VA 230V=6VA
Damper Actuators / Valve Motors
Section 21
DAMPER / VALVE MOTORS 0-10VDC / 4-20mA
E08-24M, E16-24M, E24-24M, E32-24M
WIRING:
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
Temperature Controller
5
1
6
Y1
U
0V +
24VAC/DC
2
0 -10VDC
0 -10 VDC
Selectable Input
0V
+
5
6
Y1 U
0 - 10 VDC
Temperature Controller
1
3
4
0 - 10 VDC
CLG HTG
Wiring to additional motors
E16-230M
2
4
0V +
24VAC/DC
Y2 Y1
0 or 4-20mA
1
3
U
0V +
24VAC/DC
5
6
V+
1
2
3
4
U
5
0V
N
L
230 VAC
N
L
230 VAC
6
Y1 U
2
3
4
V+
N L1
230 VAC
5
0V
6
Y1 U
0 - 10 VDC
0 - 10 VDC
0 - 10 VDC
>12V Unregulated
0V
+
CLG
HTG
Wiring to additional motors
0V Y1
0-10 VDC
Manual Positioner PAF for E..24M
MOTOR
PA or PF
1
2
3
4
1
5
2
3
4
5
Y1
0V +
24 VAC/DC
0V +
24 VAC/DC
6
U
0 - 10 VDC
Aux Switches - all ..MS Models
Honeywell 90
E16-20M
Staefa 0-20v Phase cut E16-20M
Factory Adjustment
10
80
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
1
2
3
4
U
2 -10 VDC
135ohm / 0.2 W
21
22
23
24 25
0V +
24 VAC
Y
5
6
U
2 - 10 VDC
0V +
24 VAC
Example
Motor anti-clockwise 21-22 closed at 10° and below
Motor clockwise 21-24 closed at 80° and above
INPUT RESISTANCE
ON POWER CUT THE MOTOR STOPS.
Y1 > 100KΩ
Y2 500Ω
LOAD RESISTANCE U > 50KΩ
IF THE INPUT SIGNAL IS CUT, THE MOTOR RETURNS TO 0VDC POSITION.
ADJUSTMENT:
2 x Aux switches Adjustable 0-90°
Manually set the motor to the required
switching point & rotate the cam wheel
to just over the microswitch button.
To set the second switching point
repeat this using the second cam wheel.
FOR FUNCTIONAL REASONS THE MOTOR PLUG ON MODULATING MOTORS
MUST NOT BE REVERSED
INSTALLATION:
Min cable size 7/0.2mm or
Screened cable is recommended.
Max length 100m.
The screen should be earthed at controller end only.
Keep away from power cables/units which may cause interference.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
97
Damper Actuators / Valve Motors
SPRING RETURN DAMPER/VALVE MOTORS ON-OFF/0-10VDC
ER08../ER20..
The motor stops automatically when the
end positions are reached.
Up to 10 motors can be wired in parallel.
These actuators can be used to control ventilation
dampers or valves on applications where safety
In the event of loss of power Is critical.
The motor can be mounted directly to a damper
shaft or to a valve using a linkage kit.
When the power is on the motor drives or modulates
in one direction and when power is removed the
motor springs back to the safe position.
Type
Supply
Operation
50/60Hz
Aux switch
230VAC SPDT
Motor Open (sec)
Spring
Torque
Close (sec)
Damper Area
approx
Enclosure
IP rating
ER08-230-2
ER08-230-2S
230VAC
230VAC
2 wire open/close
2 wire open/close
2 x 5(1.5)A
60
60
21
21
8Nm
8Nm
2m2IP54
2m2IP54
ER08-24-2
ER08-24-2S
24VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
2 wire open/close
2 wire open/close
2 x 5(1.5)A
150
150
22
22
8Nm
8Nm
2m2IP54
2m2IP54
ER08-24M24VAC/DC
ER08-24MS
24VAC/DC
0-10VDC/4-20mA
0-10VDC/4-20mA
2 x 5(1.5)A
150
150
22 8Nm
22
8Nm
2m2IP54
2m2IP54
ER20-230-2
ER20-230-2S
230VAC
230VAC
2 wire open/close
2 wire open/close
2x5(1.5)A
57
57
15
15
20Nm
20Nm
4m2IP54
4m2IP54
ER20-24-2
ER20-24-2S
24VAC/DC
24VAC/DC
2 wire open/close
2 wire open/close
2x5(1.5)A
57
57
15
15
20Nm
20Nm
4m2IP54
4m2IP54
ER20-24M24VAC/DC
ER20-24MS24VAC/DC
0-10VDC/4-20mA
150
0-10VDC/4-20mA
2x5(1.5)A 150
26 20Nm
26 20Nm
ER-08...
DIMENSIONS
99
57.5
64.5
3.2
120.7
19
6.4
28.5
124.8
16.7
160.7
40.7
34.5
4x
ø 5.45
ER-20...
98
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
4m2IP54
4m2IP54
Damper Actuators / Valve Motors
Section 21
Electrical Connections- 1.2m flying lead.
WIRING:
ER-08/ER20-24
ER08/ER20-230 ER08..M/ER20-.../M
DC 0(2)...10V Control
BLK
1
RED
GRY
ORN
2
3
4
+
AC/DC
24 V
~(+)
DC 0(2)...10 V
Y
DC 0(2)...10 V
+
U
COM
Auxiliary switch wiring (if Fitted)
S1
21
21
S2
22
24
25
26
23
24
WHT/ WHT/ WHT/
RED BLU GRY
BLK/
RED
BLK/
BLU
BLK/
GRY
21
22
23
COM
NC
NO
24
25
26
COM
NC
NO
Setting the auxiliary switches
The 10S and 20S models include two integral auxiliary switches
with a switch adjuster accessible on either face of the actuator.
The nominal factory setting for auxiliary switch S1 is 11° closing,
and the nominal factory setting for auxiliary switch S2 is 81°
opening.
The switch point of auxiliary switch S1 is fixed.
The switch point of auxiliary switch S2 is independently and
continuously adjustable from 25° to 95°.
The switching position can be manually changed to any required
position by turning the ratchet
ADJUSTMENTS:
A
B
Direction of rotation
Side A Spring return counter clockwise direction
Side B Clockwise direction
PLEASE NOTEThe ER08 and ER20 spring return actuators cannot be
fitted to the ER16 linkages. Call Sales for equivalents.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
99
Damper Actuators / Valve Motors
WEATHERPROOF VALVE MOTOR COVER
EE-VMC
Weatherproof cover to protect valve motors
against weather conditions.
EE-VMC
Type EE-VMC
WEATHERPROOF VALVE MOTOR COVER:
Size
Material
350mm x 380mm
PVC Nylon
DIMENSIONS
350
380
INSTALLATION:
Fit the cover over the valve motor. Care must be taken to ensure that the cover is adequately sealed to
protect from weather conditions. Due to the nature of the fitting and to allow for electrical cables the bottom
part of the cover cannot be fully sealed. Therefore the best protection will be provided with the cover
opening facing downwards. Use cable ties and sealing tape if necessary.
EE-VMC on damper motor
100
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
valves / linkages
Section 22
MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS FOR LINKAGES
EE. . M K / EE..ESB / EE..RD
EE..MK
AUTO
0<
3
MANUAL
4
4. Screw the motor onto the linkage using the
2 screws provided ensuring the valve stem
remains fully down.
5
5. As the motor rotates clockwise the valve
spindle should move upwards. Manually
operate the motor and ensure that the
spindle moves up and down freely.
For the spring return motor 2 spacers
are provided which must be fitted to the
linkage, underneath the motor.
If fitted, remove the manual handle from
the valve shaft.
Rotate the valve shoe to close the required port
(the shoe position is indicated by the flat
section on the valve shaft.)
Mount the bracket onto the valve body using
the bolts on the valve or those provided with
the linkage.
Remove the ‘U’ bracket assembly from the motor.
Fit the motor coupling over the valve shaft,
aligning the flats.
Manually close the motor and fit onto the valve
coupling and mounting bracket.
Fit the handle onto the motor aligning the
splines and bolt in position to valve stem.
The actuator and mounting bracket can be
fitted in any position to rotate the valve shoe
between the centre port and either one of
the other two ports.
>0
2
10
4
8
6
4
10
0<
>0
2
10
4
8
6
0<
AUTO
2
8
2
10
If fitted, remove the manual handle from
the valve shaft.
Rotate the valve shoe to close the required
port (the shoe position is indicated by the
flat section on the valve shaft.)
4
8
EE-2ESB
6
6
EE -1ESB
Mount the bracket onto the valve body
using the valve bolts or those provided with
the linkage.
MANU
AL
Fit the coupling over the valve shaft,
aligning the flats.
Manually close the motor and fit onto the
valve coupling and mounting bracket.
The actuator and mounting bracket can be
fitted in any position to rotate the valve shoe
between the centre port and either one of
the other two ports.
Fit the mounting bracket onto the valve body
with the two M8x10 bolts.
Fit the valve coupling onto the valve spindle
aligning the 'D' flat towards the required closed
port.
Fit the motor over the valve coupling.
The D flat on the valve spindle indicates the
closed port.
2
4
8
6
Closed
10
Open
>0
Manually close the motor by turning it
clockwise and screw it onto the bracket
using the screws provided.
10
Slide the sleeve onto the valve spindle.
DO NOT clamp the motor onto the valve
spindle without this sleeve.
0<
Mount the bracket onto the valve body
using the bolts provided.
AUTO
MANU
AL
2
>0
2
10
4
8
6
10
0<
Close the valve by rotating the spindle fully
clockwise. The valve is closed when the
line on valve stem points in line with the
valve body.
8
2
8
EE-4ESB
4
4
EE-4RD / EE-6RD
6
6
AUTO
8
AUTO
6
MANUAL
AUTO
2
4
10
0<
10
2
8
2. Slide the linkage onto the valve spindle. Bolt
the linkage onto the valve body and then
tighten the spindle screws.
MANU
AL
10
2
8
2
2
6
4
6
3. Manually rotate the motor anti-clockwise to
the closed position.
AUTO
8
10
>0
8
2
4
1. Push the valve spindle fully down.
MANU
AL
6
10
>0
6
4
1
2
4
MANUAL
8
0<
10
>0
6
4
To change the direction of rotation remove the
'U' bolt assembly/coupling from the motor by
releasing the circlip on the underside and
reverse the adaptor sleeve.
Sleeve splines up = clockwise
Sleeve splines down = anticlockwise
The actuator and mounting bracket can be
fitted in any position to rotate the valve shoe
between the centre port and either one of the
other two ports.
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
101
valves / linkages
BALL VALVES 2 WAY
EB..
EB..2A to 2H - Body = Brass
These 2 way Ball Valves are
suitable for use in heating and
air conditioning applications to
control the flow of chilled
water, hot water and up to
30% glycol in closed circuit
systems.
In open circuits ie mains water
or cooling, mineral deposits will
impair the operation.
Ball : Brass Nickel Plated
Valve Stem Gasket : Rubber EPDM
EB..FL -Body = Bronze
Ball Gasket : PTFE
Rotary travel 90º
Flanged valves to PN16
Full Bore Passage
Tight Shut-off
The motor Part Number must be clearly specified to
match each valve ordered.
Supplied complete with mounting bracket for the motor.
Select motor type E08..E16..E24..E32.. from separate
data sheet.
EB..
Type Size
Kvs
m³/h
Max Diff Pressure
Bar
Max Pressure
Bar
Media Temp
ºC
EB15-2A
EB20-2B
EB25-2C
EB32-2D
EB40-2E
15mm
20mm
25mm
32mm
40mm
½" BSP Female
¾" BSP Female
1" BSP Female
1¼" BSP Female
1½" BSP Female
16.2
26.5
47
70
145
6
6
6
6
6
16
16
16
16
16
2 - 110
2 - 110
2 - 110
2 - 110
2 - 110
E08..
E08..
E08..
E16..
E16..
EB50-2F
EB65-2G
50mm
65mm
2" BSP Female
2½" BSP Female
191
340
6
6
16
16
2 - 110
2 - 110
E16.. ER20..
E24.. ER20..
DIMENSIONS
EB..2A..2H
ACCESSORIES:
FLOW CHARTS:
EE-7EB
EE-8EB
EB.. FL
Linkage Kit with ER-08.. spring return actuator
Linkage Kit with ER-20.. spring return actuator
15 - 32mm
40 - 100mm
EB..2A..2H
EB.. FL
102
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
Select Motor
ER08..
ER08..
ER08..
ER20..
ER20..
valves / linkages
Section 22
BALL VALVES 3 WAY
EB..
Body : EB..TA..LG = Brass
These 3 way Ball Valves are suitable for use in
heating and air conditioning applications to control
the flow of chilled water, hot water and up to
30% glycol in closed circuit systems. In open
circuits ie mains water or cooling towers, mineral
deposits will impair the operation. For diverting
applications install in the return pipe only. For mixing
applications install in the flow pipe. There must be
2 inlets and 1 outlet stream at all times. Reversal of
this will cause vibration and water hammer.
Body : EB.. FL Flange: Cast Iron
Ball : Brass Nickel Plated
Ball Gasket : PTFE
Valve Stem Gasket : Rubber EPDM
Rotary travel : 90º
Flange valves to PN16
Full Bore Passage
Tight Shut-off
EB..
Type Size
Kvs
m³/h
Max Diff
Pressure Bar
Max Pressure
Bar
Port Position
Table
Media Temp
ºC
Select Motor
EB15-3TA
EB20-3TB
EB25-3TC
EB32-3TD
15mm
20mm
25mm
32mm
½" BSP Female
¾" BSP Female
1" BSP Female
1¼" BSP Female
13.4
16.5
18
26
6
6
6
6
16
16
16
16
1
1
1
1
2 - 110
E08..
2 - 110
E08..
2 - 110
E08..
2 - 110
ER08..
ER08..
ER08..
ER20..
EB40-3LE
EB50-3LF
40mm
50mm
1½" BSP Female
2" BSP Female
48.5
64.5
6
6
16
16
2
2
2 - 110
2 - 110
ER20..
ER20..
Supplied complete with mounting bracket for the motor.
The motor Part Number must be clearly specified to match each valve ordered.
Select motor type E08..E16..E24..E32.. from separate data sheet.
DIMENSIONS
ACCESSORIES:
EE-7EB
EE-8EB
Linkage Kit with ER-08.. spring return actuator
Linkage Kit with ER-20.. spring return actuator
15 - 32mm
40 - 65mm
FLOW CHARTS:
EB..TA..LG
EB.. FL
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
103
valves / linkages
LIFT & LAY / SEAT VALVES 2 & 3 WAY
MK.. MKDN..
MKDN..
Stainless steel spindle
These mixing valves are suitable for diverting or
mixing applications in closed hot water, chilled
water & up to 30% glycol systems. In open
circuits, ie mains water or cooling towers, mineral
deposits will impair the operation. For diverting
applications the valve must be installed in the
return pipe only. For mixing or diverting there
must be 2 inlets and 1 outlet stream. Reversal of
these will cause vibration & water hammer.
Flanged valves to PN16
Rangeability 30:1
Media temp. 2°C to 110°C
Tight Shut off
Max. pressure 16 Bar
Equal percentage flow characteristic
Leakage 0.1% Kvs
MK..
Type Size
MK15
MK20
MK25
MK32
MK40
MK50
15mm
20mm
25mm
32mm
40mm
50mm
MKDN50
MKDN65
MKDN80
MKDN100
50mm
65mm
80mm
100mm
Max Diff Pressure
Bar
Kvs
m³/h Lift Height
mm
Valve Body
Material
½" BSP
¾" BSP
1" BSP
1¼" BSP
1½" BSP
2" BSP
10
10
10
6.5
3.5
2.5
3
6
9
14
19
25
15
15
15
15
15
15
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
Brass
E08..
E08..
E08..
E08..
E08..
E08..
ER08..
ER08..
ER08..
ER08..
ER08..
ER08..
2" Flanged
2½" Flanged
3" Flanged
4" Flanged
3.5
2
1
0.8
40
63
100
160
16
30
30
30
Cast Iron
Cast Iron
Cast Iron
Cast Iron
E16..
E16..
E16..
E16..
ER20..
ER20..
ER20..
ER20..
ORDER VALVE + LINKAGE + MOTOR
DIMENSIONS
W
H
SEE SEPARATE DATA SHEET TO SELECT MOTOR.
VALUE
SIZE
W
L
B
H
MK15
½"
102
80
55
289
MK20
¾"
102
80
55
289
MK25
1"
102
90
60
289
B
L
EE-2MK EE-3MK EE-4MK EE-10MK
EE-11MK
EE-12MK
ACCESSORIES:
EXAMPLES:
D
MK32
1¼"
102
110
65
289
MK40
1½"
102
110
65
289
MK50
D
Select Motor
Spring Rtn
2"
102
150
85
294
MKDN50
50mm
102
230
100
309
165
MKDN65
65mm
102
291
120
344
185
MKDN80
80mm
102
312
130
354
200
MKDN100
10mm
102
350
150
400
220
Linkage Kit for MK15 to MK50 screwed valves
Linkage Kit for MKDN50 flanged valve Linkage Kit for MKDN65, MKDN80, MKDN100 flanged valves Linkage Kit for MK15 to MK50 screwed valves
Linkage Kit for MKDN50 flanged valves
Linkage Kit for MKDN65, MKDN80 flanged valves
Suitable for use with Suitable for use with Suitable for use with For Spring Return
For Spring Return
For Spring Return
E08.. E16..
E16.. E16.. ER08
ER20
ER20
Flow chart
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
motors ONLY
motors ONLY
motors ONLY
motors ONLY
motors ONLY
motors ONLY
MKDN100 MKDN80
200
MIXING
STRAIGHT THROUGH
MKDN65
DIVERTING
MKDN50
100
A
B
AB
AB
A
A
B
B
Blank Bottom Port
AB
B
M
A
A
A
M
AB
B
M
AB
Flow Rate m3 /h
AB
MK50
MK40
MK32
70
50
30
20
MK25
MK20
10
7
5
MK15
3
2
1
0.7
0.5
VALVE
Valve stem UP
Valve stem DOWN
0.3
B to AB open
A to AB open
0.2
0.1
0.1
For 2 port valves the bottom port must be blanked - Reduce ΔP
Install the valve with the spindle at any angle vertical to 30° above horizontal.
104
0.3 0.5
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
1
2
3
5
7 10
Pressure Drop
20
50 70 100 200
P kPa
500 1000
valves / linkages
Section 22
ROTARY VALVES 2 & 3 WAY
AB.. AC.. F..
F.. valves flanged to PN6
A range of rotary valves 15mm to 150mm
suitable for diverting or mixing water in closed
circuit heating applications.
Media temperature 5°C to 110°C
In open circuits ie mains water, cooling towers
etc. mineral deposits will impair the operation.
Material :
3AB.. 3AC.. & F.. G..
The position of the shoe is always opposite the
flat on the spindle.
3AB15-25
3AB20-4
3AB20-63
3AB25-8
3AB25-12
3AB32-15
3AC20
3AC25
3AC32
3AC40
3AC50
3F50
3F65
3F80
3F100
3F125
3F150
The valve can be installed with the
spindle at any angle vertical to 30°
above the horizontal plane.
All leakage rates are measured at a
differential pressure of 0.5 Bar.
F..
Type Size
Brass
Cast Iron body,
Brass shoe,
Stainless Steel spindle.
KvsLeakage % Kvs
m³/h Mixing Diverting
Max Static
Pressure
4Nm
Select
Motor
Spring
Return
15mm
20mm
20mm
25mm
25mm
32mm
20mm
25mm
32mm
40mm
50mm
½" ¾" ¾" 1" 1" 1¼" ¾" 1" 1¼" 1½" 2" BSP
BSP
BSP
BSP
BSP
BSP
BSP
BSP
BSP
BSP
BSP
2.5
4
6.3
8
12
15
8
12
18
24
40
<0.2%
<0.2%
<0.2%
<0.2%
<0.2%
<0.2%
<1%
<1%
<1%
<1%
<1%
<0.2%
<0.2%
<0.2%
<0.2%
<0.2%
<0.2%
<0.5%
<0.5%
<0.5%
<0.5%
<0.5%
10 Bar
EK4..
10 Bar
EK4..
10 Bar
10 Bar
10 Bar
10 Bar
10 Bar
10 Bar
10 Bar
10 Bar
10 Bar
E08..
E08..
E08..
E08..
E08..
E08..
E08..
E08..
E08..
E16..
E16..
ER08..
ER08..
ER08..
ER08..
ER08..
ER08..
ER08..
ER08..
ER08..
ER20..
ER20..
50mm
65mm
80mm
100mm
125mm
150mm
2" 2½" 3" 4" 5" 6" Flanged
Flanged
Flanged
Flanged
Flanged
Flanged
60
90
150
225
280
400
<1%
<1%
<1%
<1%
<1%
<1%
<0.5%
<0.5%
<0.5%
<0.5%
<0.5%
<0.5%
6 Bar
EK4..
6 Bar
6 Bar
6 Bar
6 Bar
6 Bar
E16..
E16..
E16..
E16..
E16..
E16..
ER20..
ER20..
ER20..
ER20..
ER20..
ER20..
ORDER VALVE + LINKAGE + MOTOR - SEE DATA SHEET ON MOTORS.
On 3AB.. and 3AC.. for 360° rotation remove the red disc under the knob
VALVE
3AB15-25
3AB20-4
3AB20-63
3AB25-8
3AB25-12
3AB32-18
DIMENSIONS
A
40
40
40
41
41
42
B
80
80
80
82
82
84
D
170
170
170
172
172
175
E
140
140
140
143
143
144
VALVE
3AC20
3AC25
3AC32
3AC40
3AC50
A
56
56
63.5
63.5
63.5
B
112
112
127
127
127
D
186
187
187
187
187
For 2 ports – blank the middle port - reduce ΔP
E
183
183
183
183
211
VALVE
3F50
3F65
3F80
3F100
3F125
3F150
A
97.5
100
120
132.5
150
175
B
195
200
240
265
300
350
MIXING
C
140
160
190
210
240
265
A
2
E
236
246
273
295
316
337
DIVERTING
3
3
D
D
215
225
235
245
275
305
1
2
1
2
1
1
C
2
3
3
E
B
Dimensions D & E are for E08.. E16.. motors only
D & E will be less for EK4.. & more for ER16..
On 3AB.. and 3AC.. for 360° rotation remove the red disc under the knob
ACCESSORIES:
EE-2MB Linkage for Satchwell MB valve - use E08..& E16.. motors ONLY EE-2MBF Linkage for Satchwell MBF valve - use E16.. motors ONLY
The motor can operate between ports 3-2 or 3-1
EE-1ESB EE-2ESB EE-5ESB EE-6ESB
Linkage Kit - use EK4.. motors ONLY
Linkage Kit - use E08..& E16.. motors ONLY
Linkage Kit - use ER08.. motors ONLY
Linkage Kit - use ER20.. motors ONLY
FLOW CHARTS:
3AC50
1
10.0
1.0
3F150
3F125
3F100
3F80
100
3AC40
3AC32
3AC25
3AC20
50
3F65
3F50
Flow Rate l/s
Flow (m
(m³/ h)
10
Flo
ow (m³// h)
3AB32
3AB25
3AB25
3AB20
3AB20
3AB15
10
5
1
0.1
0.5
0.1
0.01
0.1
1
10
Pressure drop (kPa)
100
0.1
0.1
1.0
10.0
Pressure drop (kPa)
100.0
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
0.5
1
2
5
10
Pressure Drop
20
50
100
P kPa
105
valves / linkages
BUTTERFLY VALVES
RD..
Materials: Cast Iron Body, Brass disc,
Stainless Steel spindle, Graphite
asbestos packing gland.
These ring butterfly valves are used to control
liquid flow in closed circuit heating systems.
RD.. valves have a small leakage rate and are
suitable for normal hot water boiler applications.
RDP.. valves have tight shut-off characteristics (see
below) and are suitable for hot water, chilled water
and up to 30% glycol systems. In open circuits ie
mains water, cooling towers, mineral deposits
will impair the operation.
Media temp. 2°C - 110°C
The RDP.. valves have a PTFE lining
providing tight shut-off and allowing
standard actuators to be used.
LARGER SIZES AVAILABLE
ON REQUEST
RD..
Type Size
mm
Max Diff Press
Bar
Kvs
m³/h Leakage %Kvs
Max Static Press
Bar
8Nm
RD25
25 8
12 0.5
RD32
32 8
20 0.5
RD40
40 8
47 0.5
RD50
50 5
850.5
RD65
65 3 1650.5
RD80
80 2 2500.5
RD100
100
1.5
435
0.5
RD125 125 1.2 7450.5
RD150 150 1 13500.5
Select Motor
16Nm
Spring
Return
16 E08..
ER08..
16 E08..
ER08..
16 E08..
ER08..
16 E16..ER20..
16 E16..ER20..
16 E16..ER20..
16
E16..
ER20..
16 E16..ER20..
16 E16..ER20..
RDP-25 258
120.05 16 E08..
ER08..
RDP-32 328
200.05 16 E08..
ER08..
RDP-40 408
620.05 16 E08..
ER08..
RDP-50 505 1150.0516 E16.. ER20..
RDP-65 653 1850.0516 E16.. ER20..
RDP-80 802 2900.0516 E16.. ER20..
RDP-100100 1.2 480 0.0516 E16.. ER20..
RDP-125125 1
785 0.0516 E16.. ER20..
RDP-150150 0.8 1400 0.0516 E16.. ER20..
RDP-200200 0.3 2400 0.05
16
E24.. 24Nm motor only.
SELECT VALVE + LINKAGE + MOTOR
SEE SEPARATE DATA SHEET TO SELECT MOTOR.
Fit valve between mating flanges for pressure ratings required between PN6 to PN16
VALVE SIZE DN D
25mm 31 64 32mm 37 76 40mm 40 86 B
50mm 50 97 H H1
65mm 65 118 80mm 80 132 100mm 100 150 L
125mm 125 182 W
150mm 150 206 L= Valve face to face dimension
200mm 200 260 DIMENSIONS
DN
EE-4RD EE-7RD EE-8RD EE-9RD EXAMPLES:
Linkage Kit for RD valves 25--150mm Linkage Kit for RD 200mm valves. Linkage Kit for RD valves 25-40mm Linkage Kit for RD valves 50-150mm 150mm
125mm
500
Flow Rate m3 /h
L
30 30 30 35 35 40 40 45 45 50 B1
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180
180 B2
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
250
B2 When using ER16..
Typical Application
200mm
1000
100mm
80mm
65mm
100
For use in low pressure hot water (LPHW) heating systems to prevent
water flow through unfired boilers in a multi-boiler installation.
RD.. valves can also be used as zone valves where slight leakage in
the closed position is acceptable.
RDP.. valves can be used on applications which require shut off
ie. hot water, chilled water and up to 30% glycol systems.
50mm
40mm
50
32mm
25mm
10
5
0.1
0.5
1
5
Pressure Drop
106
W
102 102 102 102 102 102 102 102 102 102 Suitable for use with E08.. and E16.. motors ONLY
Suitable for use with E24.. motors ONLY
Suitable for use with ER08.. spring return motors ONLY
Suitable for use with ER20.. spring return motors ONLY
2000
1
0.8
H1 215 232 242 256 272 288 310 339 372 458 B1 when using E08.. E16.. E24..
D
ACCESSORIES:
H
176 187 192 202 208 218 228 242 262 324 10
P kPa
50
Operation
When installed in a boiler return pipeline and the system requires the
boiler to operate, a control signal/changeover contact can be used to
motor open the valve and allow water to flow through the boiler.
The burner can then operate under the control of the boiler thermostat.
A motor with auxiliary switches can be used to ensure that the valve is
open before the burner operates.
Installation: Install the valve with the spindle at any angle from vertical
to 30 degrees above the horizontal plane.
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
valves / linkages
Section 22
MOTORISED SPRING RETURN VALVES 2 & 3 PORT
EZV..
ORDER AUXILIARY SWITCH SEPARATELY
Media temp. 4°C to 110°C
Max. pressure 10 Bar
2 & 3 port spring return valves for
zoning & diverting in closed circuit hot
water, chilled water & up to 30% glycol
systems.
Supplied complete with motors.
Consumption 5W
Max ambient 60°C
Materials: brass body, rubber ball/plug
for 100% shut off.
EZV-2..
Wiring cable 0.5m
Auto/Manual lever
EZV-3..
Type Connection
Max Diff Press
Bar
Kvs
m³/h Replaceable motor
Supply
±10%
Motor
Open
Spring
Close
Application
Enclosure
EZV-211
EZV-212
EZV-213
EZV-214
EZV-215
EZV-216
½" BSP
15mm comp.
¾" BSP
22mm comp.
1" BSP
28mm comp.
0.90
0.90
0.90
0.90
0.90
0.90
6.0
6.0
7.0
7.0
9.0
9.0
230VAC
230VAC
230VAC
230VAC
230VAC
230VAC
10s
10s
10s
10s
10s
10s
4s
4s
4s
4s
4s
4s
Zone
Zone
Zone
Zone
Zone
Zone
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
EZV-311
EZV-312
EZV-313
EZV-314
EZV-315
EZV-316
½" BSP
15mm comp.
¾" BSP
22mm comp.
1" BSP
28mm comp.
1.54
1.54
1.54
1.54
0.62
0.62
6.6
6.6
7.8
7.8
12.6
12.6
230VAC
230VAC
230VAC
230VAC
230VAC
230VAC
20s
20s
20s
20s
20s
20s
6s
6s
6s
6s
6s
6s
Diverting
Diverting
Diverting
Diverting
Diverting
Diverting
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
EZV-M1
Auxiliary switch for EZV.. DIMENSIONS
230VAC 3(1)A SPST The volt free contact closes when the valve is fully open
EZV-2..
EZV-3..
67
AUTO
92
MAN
67
80
AUTO
Install the valve with the motor at
any angle vertical to 30° above
the horizontal plane.
92
D
MAN
100
E
B
B
Type EZV-311,312,313,314 EZV-315,316 D
79 84 E
125
130
A
A
46
20
A B
46
46
46
EZV-2..
FLOW CHARTS:
EZV-3..
1
2
3
4
1
1
2
3
1
4
100
100
46
WIRING:
blue
EZV-2..
brown
50
P kPa
P kPa
valve
10
EZV-3..
blue
neutral
brown
0.5
5
10
50
100
200
EXAMPLES:
black
earth
5
10
50
100
200
l /min
l /min
EZV-2..
A
A
OUTLET
MOTOR
A
motor on
(auto)
MOTOR
B
INLET
EZV-3..
valve
motor off
MOTOR
INLET
A
AB
motor on
(auto)
OUTLET
MANUAL
LEVER
MOTOR
A
RETURN
AB
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
B
INLET
B
LOAD
motor off
manual lever
locked open
MOTOR
A
OUTLET
MOTOR
RETURN
MANUAL
LEVER
B
motor off
B
LOAD
switch
} auxiliary
Type EZV - M1
black
1
0.5
live
thermostat
yellow / green
1
auxiliary switch
Type EZV - M1
black
5
5
}
black
earth
10
live
thermostat
yellow / green
50
neutral
motor off
manual lever
locked open
B
RETURN
LOAD
AB
107
General Order Information and Safety
GENERAL ORDER INFORMATION
HOW TO ORDER
CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY
BY PHONE Monday to Thursday 8.30 to 16.45,
Friday 8.30 to 16.15. Orders for delivery
the following day must be placed before
15.00. After this time please call us.
Please confirm all verbal orders in writing
marked ”confirmation order”.
PRICES
BY FAX Any time on +44(0)1480 407076. Please
specify product , quantity, description,
delivery and invoice address, order
numbers and delivery method.
BY EMAIL
Send to [email protected]
Prices shown exclude VAT. The prices are subject to
change with appropriate notice.
TERMS
See Terms and Conditions at the back of the catalogue.
MINIMUM ORDER VALUE
The minimum order value is £50 net order value unless
agreed in writing in advance.
DELIVERY CHARGE
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
For further information on listed products do not hesitate
to call us on +44(0)1480 407074.We can supply
technical data sheets where available or offer technical
assistance with your application.
RETURNED GOODS
Returned goods will only be accepted if faulty and when
accompanied by complete documentation.
A minimum restocking charge of 25% will be made for
returned goods which are found not to be faulty.
All returns must be agreed in advance.
Unless agreed in writing in advance the fixed delivery
charges will be:
£13.50 for 1 to 2 day delivery in England, Scotland and
Wales.
£25.50 for next weekday delivery before 10.00 in
England, Scotland and Wales.
£16.50 for 1 to 2 day delivery in N.Ireland.
Deliveries to Southern Ireland by quotation.
Overseas deliveries by quotation.
DISCOUNTS
For general business discounts are by written agreement.
For large quantity orders we will be pleased to quote
special discounts for a specific order.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Make sure you have selected the correct input voltage for the product before installation.
The product wiring should be checked by a qualified technician before applying voltage to it.
Observe all applicable safety precautions and wiring and earthing regulations.
Isolate the product from the mains before removing any covers.
Observe any special requirements for cabling, screened cable, for example.
If failure of a fuse occurs determine the reason for failure before replacing it with a new one of the correct type and
current rating.
After installation ensure that the product works correctly. If failure of the device can cause damage a safety back
up control should be fitted.
Under no circumstances use a product for a purpose other than that defined in the catalogue. If in doubt consult
the factory.
Retain the product data sheets for future use.
Product data given is for guidance purposes only and is subject to change without prior notice. Its accuracy is not
guaranteed unless confirmed by us in writing.
108
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
NOTES
Section 23
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
109
NOTES
110
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 \ F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
NOTES
Section 23
[email protected] \ wattsindustries.co.uk
111
Watts Industries UK Ltd
Colmworth Business Park, Eaton Socon, St. Neots, PE19 8YX, UK
T: +44 (0) 1480 407074 • F: +44 (0) 1480 407076
[email protected] • wattsindustries.co.uk
ELECTRO CATALOGUE-UK-W-UK
UK-W-UK-05-2017-Rev0
© 2017 Watts
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement